Canon All in One Printer 3555B001AA User Manual
Basic Operation Guide  
Next  
Quick View- Perform Useful Tasks  
Page  
P.1-1  
P.2-1  
P.3-1  
P.4-1  
P.5-1  
P.6-1  
P.7-1  
P.8-1  
P.9-1  
Before Using the Machine  
Document and Paper Handling  
Copying  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
Printing from a Computer  
Registering Destinations  
in the Address Book  
Using the Fax Functions  
Using the Scan Functions  
Maintenance  
Network Setting Procedure  
Security Functions  
Searching in Detail  
See the e-Manual.  
User Software CD-ROM  
Troubleshooting  
Searching the Installation and  
Connection Procedure  
Registering/  
Setting the Various Functions  
P.  
P.  
10  
-1  
-1  
See the Starter Guide.  
11  
Appendix  
Please read this guide before operating this product.  
After you finish reading this guide, store it in a safe  
place for future reference.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Quick View- Perform Useful Tasks  
Copy  
Print  
Fax  
Scan  
Network Settings & Remote UI  
There are a variety of print functions that are explained in later pages of this manual as well as in the e-Manual.  
Enlarge or reduce documents and print multiple-page data onto one sheet. If you are using the MF8350Cdn, you can  
also perform 2-sided printing.  
Below is a quick overview of highlighted print features that you can utilize in your everyday use.  
For details, see "Printing from a Computer" from p. 4-1.  
Various Printing Functions  
Enlarged/Reduced Printing  
Reduced Layout  
You can enlarge or reduce standard size documents to copy  
on standard size paper or specify the copy ratio in  
percentage.  
You can reduce multiple documents to print them onto one  
sheet.  
2-Sided Printing (MF8350Cdn Only)  
You can print on both sides of paper.  
For details, see "Print" in the  
e-Manual.  
Miscellaneous Printing Functions  
Booklet Printing (MF8350Cdn Only)  
Watermark Printing  
Booklet printing allows you to make a booklet by folding  
printouts in half.  
You can superimpose watermarks (such as [COPY] and  
[DRAFT]) over the documents created by an application.  
Switching between Color and B&W Printing  
You can print color documents in black and white.  
Poster Printing  
Displaying a Preview before Printing  
You can magnify and divide a single page image to print it out  
on multiple sheets of paper. You can make one large poster  
by joining these printouts together.  
You can check the printout result on a computer display.  
Selecting a "Profile"  
Some printer driver settings are provided as "Profiles"  
beforehand.  
You can perform printing which suits your needs only by  
selecting a "Profile."  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Quick View- Perform Useful Tasks  
Copy  
Print  
Fax  
Scan  
Network Settings & Remote UI  
There are a variety of fax functions that are explained in later pages of this manual as well as in the e-Manual. The  
machine is equipped with a Super G3 fax, with high transmission speeds as well as the PC function which can send  
a document from a computer directly, which reduces paper costs.  
Below is a quick overview of highlighted fax features that you can utilize in your everyday use.  
For details, see "Fax" in the  
e-Manual.  
Sending a Document Directly from a Computer (PC Fax)  
You can send a document or image created in an application  
as a fax directly using the fax driver from a computer on a  
network. Because you do not need to print the document, you  
can reduce the paper cost as well as send a clear document  
which has little dirt or blur.  
You can import the address book using the fax driver,  
enabling you to send a fax to a destination easily without  
mistakes.  
You can also create a cover sheet for when sending a fax.  
* You need to install the fax driver in a computer.  
* If you are a Macintosh user, see the Fax Driver Guide.  
Data is created  
in a computer.  
Send  
Fax driver screen  
For details, see "Using the Fax Functions" from p. 6-1.  
Forwarding the Received Fax  
You can forward received faxes automatically to a destination  
specified beforehand.  
By specifying the forwarding settings, you can forward all of  
the received documents.  
Received fax  
Forward  
For details, see "Registering Destinations in the Address Book" from p. 5-1.  
Registering Destinations in the Address Book  
By registering destinations for sending faxes beforehand, you  
can save many steps to enter the destinations when sending  
the documents.  
One-touch keys  
Coded dialing  
Group dialing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Quick View- Perform Useful Tasks  
Copy  
Print  
Fax  
Scan  
Network Settings & Remote UI  
For details, see "Using the Fax Functions" from p. 6-1.  
Various Sending/Receiving Functions  
Various Sending Functions  
Various Methods for Specifying a Destination  
Destination Group  
You can combine multiple destinations and register them as a  
group.  
Up to 199 destinations can be combined.  
You can register fax destinations in the address book. You can  
specify the destinations using various methods, enabling you to  
send documents quickly and easily.  
Destination search  
AAAA  
BBBB  
CCCC  
Specifying from the sending history  
One-touch keys  
By registering destinations in one-touch keys, you can specify  
a destination in one step.  
You can register up to 19 destinations in one-touch keys.  
The previous setting  
The second previous setting  
The third previous setting  
AAAA  
Sequential broadcast  
By scanning a document once, you can send the same  
document to multiple destinations.  
Coded dialing  
Because you can register up to 181 destinations under coded  
dial codes, you can register destinations which cannot be  
registered under one-touch keys.  
If you forget the coded dial codes, you can specify the  
destination by searching it in the address book.  
AAA  
CCC  
MMM  
SSS  
BBBB  
###  
Coded Dial  
Number  
Various Receiving Functions  
Receiving in the Memory  
Remote Receiving  
Received documents are normally printed immediately.  
However, you can store the documents temporarily in the  
memory without printing.  
You can print the stored documents at any time. If you do not  
need them, you can delete them, saving paper to be used.  
If an external telephone is connected, you can switch to the  
fax receiving mode immediately by dialing the ID number for  
fax receiving using the dial buttons of the telephone during a  
phone call.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Quick View- Perform Useful Tasks  
Copy  
Print  
Fax  
Scan  
Network Settings & Remote UI  
There are a variety of scan functions that are explained in later pages of this manual as well as in the e-Manual. You  
can easily send scanned documents to your computer as well as save scanned images or documents to a USB  
memory directly from the machine.  
Below is a quick overview of highlighted scan features that you can utilize in your everyday use.  
For details, see "Using the Scan Functions" from p. 7-1.  
Saving in a Computer  
There are two methods for saving scanned documents in a computer.  
Saving the Documents Using the Operation Panel of the Machine  
1
You can easily save scanned documents  
in a computer only by operating the  
operation panel of the machine.  
Documents  
Various scanning settings have been  
prepared for your purposes. Therefore,  
you can create a "Searchable PDF" file,  
which can be used for text retrieval or as  
text data, without specifying special  
settings.  
2
Data  
3
Saving the Documents Using Operations from a Computer  
Documents  
Scanning with the MF Toolbox  
1
Scanning is performed by operating the  
software supplied with the machine.  
For details, see "Scan" in the  
e-Manual.  
Data  
3
2
Scanning from an Application  
Scanning with the WIA Driver (Windows XP/Vista/7 Only)  
Scanning is performed using your application.  
This allows you to open the scanned data as  
is in your application.  
Scanning is performed using the driver system supplied with  
Windows operating systems.  
There are various scanning methods.  
࣭
Scanning from the [Scanner and Camera Wizard] dialog box  
Scanning from the [Windows Fax and Scan] dialog box  
࣭
For details, see "Scan" in the  
e-Manual.  
࣭
Scanning from Windows Photo Gallery  
࣭
Scanning from an Application  
For details, see "Scan" in the  
e-Manual.  
For details, see "Using the Scan Functions" from p. 7-1.  
Saving in a USB Memory  
You can save scanned documents in a USB memory connected to the machine.  
Documents  
Data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Quick View- Perform Useful Tasks  
Copy  
Print  
Fax  
Scan  
Network Settings & Remote UI  
There are a variety of network settings that are explained in the e-Manual. Since the machine has a built-in network  
board, you can print, fax, and scan from a computer via a network. You can also perform efficient management by  
configuring the machine using the Remote UI.  
Below is a quick overview of highlighted network settings that you can utilize in your everyday use.  
For details, see "Network Settings" in the  
e-Manual.  
Various Network Settings  
Configuration for communicating  
Basic Network Settings  
Miscellaneous Settings  
with a computer  
Setting the IP address (IPv4)  
Configuring the machine  
- LPD, RAW, WSD  
As needed  
Communication mode/  
Communication speed  
Waiting time for connection  
DNS  
- IP address  
- Subnet mask  
- Gateway address  
Configuring a computer  
As needed  
WINS server  
- Port settings  
- Sharing settings for the printer  
Setting the IP address (IPv6)  
For details, see "Security" in the  
e-Manual.  
Security Settings  
Restricting Destination Operations/  
Sending Functions  
Administration Settings  
Restricting Network Connection  
System administrator settings  
- Manager ID/PIN  
SNMP settings  
Address book PIN  
Allowing the HTTP communication  
Setting a port number  
Restricting new destinations  
Restricting the PC fax  
Device information  
Restricting sending from history  
Fax number confirmation re-entry  
Restricting sequential broadcast  
Restricting displaying the job history  
Restricting memory media  
Restricting USB connection  
- Device name/Installation site  
Dept. ID management  
- Department ID/PIN/  
Function restriction  
- Unknown ID job management  
Remote UI On/Off  
For details, see "Setting and Managing from Computer" in the  
e-Manual.  
Configuring Using the Remote UI  
Remote UI Functions  
How to start the Remote UI  
e-Manual → Starting the Remote UI  
Log on to the Remote UI.  
Checking the status and information  
of the machine  
Job Management  
1
2
3
Start the web browser.  
(1) Select [System Manager Mode] or [End-User  
Mode].  
(2) For [System Manager Mode], enter [System  
Manager ID] and [System Manager PIN].  
For [End-User Mode], enter [User Name].  
(3) Click [OK].  
Enter "http://<the IP address of the  
machine>/" in the address field, and  
then press the [ENTER] key on your  
keyboard.  
System settings  
Forwarding settings  
Department ID management  
Address book management  
Device settings  
(1)  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C o n t e n t s  
Paper Type  
2-7  
Contents  
ii  
v
Printable Range  
2-8  
Manuals for the Machine  
Available Features  
Loading Paper  
2-9  
vi  
In the Paper Cassette  
2-9  
2-11  
2-12  
2-13  
2-13  
2-14  
How to Use This Manual  
Important Safety Instructions  
Installation Requirements and Handling  
Legal Notices  
vi  
In the Multi-Purpose Tray (for MF8350Cdn)  
In the Manual Feed Slot (for MF8050Cn)  
Precautions when Loading Paper  
Paper Loading Capacity  
vii  
xi  
xiii  
xvii  
Paper Loading Orientation  
When printing paper with a letterhead or logo  
(previously printed paper)  
Laser Safety  
2-14  
2-15  
Printing on Envelopes  
1. Before Using the Machine  
1-1  
Setting a Paper Size and Type  
2-16  
For the Paper Cassette  
2-16  
Names and Functions on Each Part of the Machine  
1-2  
Registering the Default Paper Settings for the Multi-purpose Tray  
(Manual Feed Slot)  
Front Side  
1-2  
1-3  
1-4  
1-5  
1-6  
1-7  
2-16  
2-17  
Back Side  
Registering a Custom Paper Size  
Interior  
Selecting Print Side (MF8350Cdn Only)  
2-19  
Multi-purpose Tray (Manual Feed Slot)  
Paper Cassette  
Operation Panel  
When setting this item to <Print Speed Priority>  
(the default setting)  
2-19  
2-19  
When setting this item to <Print Side Priority>  
Main Operation Panel  
Fax Operation Panel  
1-7  
1-8  
1-9  
LCD (Standby Mode)  
3. Copying  
3-1  
Copy Mode  
Fax Mode  
1-9  
1-9  
1-9  
Basic Copying Method  
3-2  
Scan Mode  
Canceling Copy Jobs  
3-2  
Text Input Method  
1-10  
Copy Settings  
3-3  
Changing Entry Mode  
1-10  
1-10  
1-10  
1-10  
Entering Letters and Symbols  
Moving the Cursor (Entering a Space)  
Deleting Characters  
Selecting Copy Papers  
3-3  
3-3  
3-4  
3-4  
3-5  
3-5  
3-6  
3-6  
3-6  
Adjusting the Density  
Selecting Image Quality (Copy)  
2-Sided Copying (MF8350Cdn Only)  
Enlarging/Reducing Copies  
Setting the Sleep Timer  
1-11  
1-12  
Setting the Current Date and Time  
Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (N on 1)  
Collating Copies  
2. Document and Paper Handling 2-1  
Erase Dark Borders and Frame Lines (Frame Erase)  
Emphasize the Outline of an Image (Sharpness)  
Documents Requirements  
Scanning Range  
2-2  
2-2  
Copying the ID Card  
3-7  
3-8  
Changing the Default Values  
Copy  
2-2  
2-3  
2-3  
2-3  
FAX  
Scan (Saving in a Computer)  
Scan (Saving in a USB Memory)  
4. Printing from a Computer  
4-1  
Placing Documents  
2-4  
Installing the Printer Driver  
Printing from a Computer  
4-2  
4-3  
Placing Documents on the Platen Glass  
Loading Document in the Feeder  
2-4  
2-4  
Scaling Print Output  
4-3  
4-3  
4-4  
Paper Requirements  
2-6  
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet  
2-sided Printing (MF8350Cdn Only)  
Paper Size  
2-6  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Checking/Deleting Print Jobs  
4-4  
Re-forwarding/Printing/Deleting the Documents in which a  
Forwarding Error Occurs  
Checking Print Status in the Middle of Printing or Waiting  
Deleting Print Job in the Middle of Printing or Waiting  
4-5  
4-5  
6-15  
Checking/Handling Fax Documents in Memory  
6-17  
Checking/Canceling Fax Transmission Documents  
Printing Received Fax Documents  
6-17  
6-17  
6-18  
6-19  
5. Registering Destinations in the  
Address Book  
5-1  
Checking/Deleting Received Fax Documents  
Checking the History of Received/Sent Fax Documents  
Address Book  
5-2  
Changing the Default Values for Fax  
6-20  
One-touch Keys  
Coded Dialing  
Group Dialing  
5-2  
5-2  
5-2  
Changing the Fax Settings  
(Items Specified Using the [Menu] Button)  
6-21  
Storing/Editing One-Touch Keys  
5-3  
Setting procedure for Sending  
6-21  
6-21  
Setting Items for the Send Settings  
Storing/Editing from the Operation Panel  
Storing/Editing from the Remote UI  
5-3  
5-4  
Register Username  
Change Defaults  
Sender ID  
6-22  
6-22  
6-22  
6-22  
6-22  
6-22  
6-22  
6-23  
6-23  
6-23  
6-23  
Storing/Editing Coded Dial Codes  
5-6  
Fax No.  
Storing/Editing from the Operation Panel  
Storing/Editing from the Remote UI  
5-6  
5-8  
Select Line Type  
Offhook Alarm  
ECM Sending  
Storing/Editing Recipients for Group Dialing  
5-9  
Pause Time  
Storing/Editing from the Operation Panel  
Storing/Editing from the Remote UI  
5-9  
Auto Redial  
5-12  
Check Dial Tone Before Sending  
Setting Procedure for Receiving  
Setting Items for the Receive Settings  
6-24  
6. Using the Fax Functions  
6-1  
2-Sided Printing (MF8350Cdn Only)  
Receive Data Reduction  
Received Page Footer  
6-24  
6-24  
6-24  
6-24  
6-24  
6-25  
6-25  
6-25  
6-25  
Basic Method for Sending Faxes  
6-2  
Continue Printing When Toner Is Low  
ECM Receiving  
Canceling Sending of Fax Documents  
6-2  
Fax Settings  
6-3  
Incoming Ring  
Remote Receiving  
Image Quality Settings  
Density Settings  
6-3  
6-3  
6-3  
Manual/Auto Switch  
System settings procedure  
Sharpness Settings  
Setting Items for the System Settings  
6-26  
Specifying Destinations  
6-4  
Send Start Speed  
6-26  
6-26  
6-26  
6-26  
6-27  
6-27  
6-27  
6-27  
6-27  
6-27  
Receive Start Speed  
Specifying Destinations by Entering a Fax Number  
Specifying Destinations Using the One-Touch Keys  
Specifying Destinations Using Coded Dial  
6-4  
6-4  
6-4  
6-5  
6-5  
Select Country/Region  
Memory Lock Settings  
Address Book PIN  
Restrict New Destinations  
Allow Driver Faxing  
Specifying Destinations Using Group Dialing  
Specifying Destinations Using the Address Book  
Restrict Sending from History  
Fax No. Confirmation Re-Entry  
Restrict Sequential Broadcast  
Redialing (Manual Redialing)  
Useful Fax Sending Methods  
6-6  
6-7  
Sending a Fax after Making a Phone Call (Manual Sending)  
Push-button Telephone Service Using a Dial-line  
Sending a Fax Abroad (Adding Pauses)  
6-7  
6-7  
6-8  
7. Using the Scan Functions  
7-1  
Basic Operation Methods for Scanning  
7-2  
Sending to Multiple Destinations at a Time (Sequential Broadcast) 6-9  
Scanning Documents and Saving Them in a Computer  
(USB & Network Connection)  
Receiving Faxes  
6-10  
7-2  
7-3  
Receive Mode  
6-10  
6-12  
6-13  
Saving Scanned Documents in a USB Memory  
Changing the Receive Mode  
Detailed Settings for the Fax/Tel Mode  
8. Maintenance  
8-1  
Forwarding Fax Documents  
6-14  
Cleaning the Machine  
8-2  
Registering Forwarding Destinations (Automatic Forwarding) 6-14  
Forwarding Received Fax Documents in Memory to Other  
Cleaning the Exterior  
Cleaning the Fixing Unit  
Cleaning the ITB  
8-2  
8-2  
8-3  
Destinations (Manual Forwarding)  
6-14  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning the Platen Glass  
8-3  
8-4  
10. Registering/Setting the Various  
Functions  
Cleaning the Feeder Automatically  
10-1  
Replacing Toner Cartridges  
8-5  
Setting Menu List  
10-2  
About the Supplied Toner Cartridge  
About Replacement Toner Cartridges  
Handling Toner Cartridges  
8-5  
8-5  
8-6  
8-6  
8-7  
8-7  
Printing a User Data List  
10-2  
10-2  
Contents of the Setting Menu  
Checking the Toner Level  
When a Message Appears  
11. Appendix  
11-1  
Replacing Toner Cartridges  
Precautions when Replacing Toner Cartridges  
Purchase Consumables  
8-8  
Main Specifications  
11-2  
8-9  
Machine Specifications  
11-2  
11-2  
11-2  
11-3  
11-3  
11-3  
11-3  
Recycling Used Cartridges  
8-10  
Copy Specifications  
The Clean Earth Campaign  
U.S.A. PROGRAM  
8-10  
8-10  
Printer Specification  
Scanner Specifications  
Packaging  
8-10  
8-11  
8-12  
Fax Specifications  
Shipping  
Telephone Specifications  
Cassette Feeding Unit-V1 (optional) (MF8350Cdn Only)  
CANADA PROGRAM-CANADA PROGRAMME  
Transporting the Machine  
8-13  
Index  
11-4  
Precautions when Transporting the Machine  
8-14  
9. Troubleshooting  
9-1  
Clearing Jams  
9-2  
Document Jams in the Feeder  
9-2  
9-3  
9-4  
9-5  
Paper Jams in the Paper Cassette (Cassette 1 or 2)  
Paper Jams in the Multi-purpose Tray (MF8350Cdn Only)  
Paper Jams in the Manual Feed Slot (MF8050Cn Only)  
Paper Jams in the Rear Cover or Duplex Unit (MF8350Cdn Only) 9-6  
Paper Jams in the Output Area (MF8350Cdn Only) 9-7  
Paper Jams in the Output Area and Rear Cover (MF8050Cn Only) 9-8  
Display Messages  
9-9  
9-9  
Error Code  
If <Incorrect size/setting> Appears  
9-11  
Troubleshooting  
9-12  
Check the Following First  
9-12  
Is the power switch turned ON?  
9-12  
9-12  
9-12  
9-12  
9-13  
9-13  
9-13  
Has the power switch been just turned ON?  
Is the machine in Sleep mode?  
Is the Error indicator on or blinking?  
Is a message displayed on the display?  
Is the telephone line connected or configured properly?  
If You Cannot Solve a Problem  
If a Power Failure Occurs  
9-14  
9-15  
If You Cannot Solve a Problem  
Customer Support (U.S.A.)  
Customer Support (Canada)  
9-15  
9-16  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Manuals for the Machine  
Starter Guide  
Read this manual first.  
This manual describes the settings for  
the machine and software installation.  
Be sure to read this manual before using  
the machine.  
•
•
•
•
•
Preface  
Installing the Machine  
Configuring and Connecting the Fax  
Connecting to a Computer and Installing the Drivers  
Appendix  
Basic Operation Guide  
This manual  
•
•
•
•
Using the Scan Functions  
Maintenance  
Troubleshooting  
Registering/Setting the Various  
Functions  
•
•
•
•
•
Before Using the Machine  
Document and Paper Handling  
Copying  
Printing from a Computer  
Registering Destinations  
in the Address Book  
Read this manual next.  
This manual describes the basic  
machine operations.  
•
Appendix  
•
Using the Fax Functions  
e-Manual  
* The e-Manual is included in the User Software CD-ROM.  
• Setting and Managing from  
Computer  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Basic Operation  
Copy  
Fax  
Print  
Scan  
Read the desired chapter  
to suit your needs.  
The e-Manual is categorized by subject to  
find desired information easily.  
•
•
•
•
Troubleshooting  
Maintenance  
Setting Menu List  
Specifications  
Network Settings  
Security  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Available Features  
The available features are introduced for each model.  
: available  
{
-: not available  
Copy  
Print  
2-sided Printing Fax (PC Fax)  
USB Scan  
Network Scan  
Remote UI  
ADF (1-sided) ADF (2-sided)  
MF8350Cdn  
MF8050Cn  
-
-
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
-
How to Use This Manual  
Symbols Used in This Manual  
Indicates a warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to persons if not performed correctly. To  
use the machine safely, always pay attention to these warnings.  
WARNING  
CAUTION  
Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the  
machine safely, always pay attention to these cautions.  
Indicates operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these items carefully to operate the machine  
correctly, and avoid damage to the machine or property.  
IMPORTANT  
Indicates a clarification of an operation, or contains additional explanations for a procedure. Reading these notes is  
highly recommended.  
NOTE  
Keys and Buttons Used in This Manual  
The following symbols and key names are a few examples of how keys to be pressed are expressed in this manual.  
• Operation panel keys: [Key icon] + (Key name)  
Example: [  
] (Stop)  
• Display: <Specify destination.>  
• Buttons and items on the computer display: [Preferences]  
Illustrations Used in This Manual  
Illustrations used in this manual  
Illustrations of the model MF8350Cdn are used in this manual. When there is any difference among the machines,  
it is clearly indicated in the text, e.g., "For MF8050Cn."  
For information on the standard features for each model, see the followings.  
"Available Features" (→P.vi)  
The display used in this manual  
The display used in this manual is the factory preset display for the MF8350Cdn. Depending on the system configuration and product purchased,  
the appearance of the display may differ.  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Important Safety Instructions  
Please read these "Important Safety Instructions" thoroughly before operating the machine.  
As these instructions are intended to prevent injury to the user and other persons or to prevent destruction of property, always pay  
attention to these instructions and operational requirements.  
Also, as it may result in unexpected accidents or injuries, do not perform any operation unless otherwise specified in the manual.  
- A location exposed to smoke and steam, such as near a  
cookery or humidifier  
Installation  
- A location exposed to rain or snow  
WARNING  
- A location near a water faucet or water  
• Do not install the machine in a location near alcohol, paint  
- A location exposed to direct sunlight  
- A location subject to high temperatures  
- A location near open flames  
thinner, or other flammable substances. If flammable sub-  
stances come into contact with electrical parts inside the  
machine, this may result in a fire or electrical shock.  
• Do not place the following items on the machine.  
- Necklaces and other metal objects  
• When installing the machine, gently lower the machine to  
the installation site so as not to catch your hands between  
the machine and the floor or between the machine and  
other equipment, as this may result in personal injury.  
- Cups, vases, flowerpots, and other containers filled with  
water or liquids  
• When connecting the interface cable, connect it properly by  
following the instructions in this manual. If not connected  
properly, this may result in malfunction or electrical shock.  
If these items come into contact with a high-voltage area in-  
side the machine, this may result in a fire or electrical shock.  
If these items are dropped or spilled inside the machine,  
immediately turn off the power switches of the machine and  
computer (1) and disconnect the interface cable if it is con-  
nected (2). Then, unplug the power plug from the AC power  
outlet (3) and contact your local authorized Canon dealer.  
• When moving the machine, follow the instructions in this  
manual to hold it correctly. Failure to do so may cause you to  
drop the machine, resulting in personal injury.  
“Transporting the Machine”(→P.8-13)  
(2)  
Power Supply  
(2)  
(1)  
WARNING  
• Do not damage or modify the power cord. Also, do not place  
heavy objects on the power cord or pull on or excessively  
bend it. This can cause electrical damage, resulting in fire or  
electrical shock.  
(3)  
(1)  
• Keep the power cord away from all heat sources. Failure to  
do so can cause the power cord insulation to melt, resulting  
in a fire or electrical shock.  
(2)  
(2)  
• The power cord should not be taut, as this may lead to a  
loose connection and cause overheating, which could result  
in a fire.  
(1)  
• The power cord may become damaged if it is stepped  
on, fixed with staples, or if heavy objects are placed on it.  
Continued use of a damaged power cord can lead to an ac-  
cident, such as a fire or electrical shock.  
(3)  
(1)  
• Do not plug or unplug the power plug with wet hands, as  
this can result in electrical shock.  
• When installing and removing the optional accessories, be  
sure to turn the machine off, unplug the power plug, and  
then disconnect all the interface cables and power cord from  
the machine. Otherwise, the power cord or interface cables  
may be damaged, resulting in a fire or electrical shock.  
• Do not plug the power cord into a multiplug power strip, as  
this can result in a fire or electrical shock.  
• Do not bundle up or tie up the power cord in a knot, as this  
can result in a fire or electrical shock.  
• Insert the power plug completely into the AC power outlet.  
Failure to do so can result in a fire or electrical shock.  
CAUTION  
• Do not install the machine in unstable locations, such as on  
unsteady platforms or inclined floors, or in locations subject  
to excessive vibrations, as this may cause the machine to fall  
or tip over, resulting in personal injury.  
• If excessive stress is applied to the connection part of the  
power cord, it may damage the power cord or the wires in-  
side the machine may disconnect. This could result in a fire.  
Avoid the following situations:  
• The ventilation slots are provided for proper ventilation of  
working parts inside the machine. Never place the machine  
on a soft surface, such as a bed, sofa, or rug. Blocking the  
slots can cause the machine to overheat, resulting in a fire.  
- Connecting and disconnecting the power cord frequently.  
- Tripping over the power cord.  
- The power cord is bent near the connection part, and  
continuous stress is being applied to the power outlet or  
the connection part.  
• Do not install the machine in the following locations, as this  
may result in a fire or electrical shock.  
- A damp or dusty location  
- Applying a shock to the power connector.  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
• Do not use power cords other than the one provided, as this  
can result in a fire or electrical shock.  
CAUTION  
• Do not place heavy objects on the machine. The object or  
the machine may fall, resulting in personal injury.  
• As a general rule, do not use extension cords. Using an ex-  
tension cord may result in a fire or electrical shock.  
• Turn off the power switch when the machine will not be  
used for a long period of time, such as overnight. Turn off  
the machine and unplug the power plug if the machine  
will not be used for an extended period of time, such as for  
several days.  
• Remove the power plug from the AC power outlet and  
refrain from using the machine while it thunders. Lightening  
can result in a fire, electrical shock or malfunction.  
CAUTION  
• Open or close covers and install or remove cassettes gently  
and carefully. Be careful not to hurt your fingers.  
• Do not use a power supply voltage other than that listed  
herein, as this may result in a fire or electrical shock.  
• Keep your hands and clothing away from the roller in the  
output area. Even if the machine is not printing, the roller  
may suddenly rotate and catch your hands or clothing,  
resulting in personal injury.  
• Always grasp the power plug when unplugging the power  
plug. Do not pull on the power cord, as this may expose the  
core wire of the power cord or damage the cord insulation,  
causing electricity to leak, resulting in a fire or electrical  
shock.  
• The output slot is hot during and immediately after printing.  
Do not touch the area surrounding the output slot, as this  
may result in burns.  
• Leave sufficient space around the power plug so that it can  
be unplugged easily. If objects are placed around the power  
plug, you may be unable to unplug it in an emergency.  
• Printed paper may be hot immediately after being output.  
Be careful when removing the paper and aligning the re-  
moved paper, especially after continuous printing. Failure to  
do so may result in burns.  
Handling  
• When performing copy with a thick book placed on the  
platen glass, do not press the feeder forcefully. This may  
damage the platen glass and cause personal injury.  
WARNING  
• Do not disassemble or modify the machine. There are  
high-temperature and high-voltage components inside the  
machine which may result in a fire or electrical shock.  
• Be careful not to drop a heavy object, such as a dictionary,  
on the platen glass. This may damage the platen glass and  
cause personal injury.  
• Electrical equipment can be hazardous if not used properly.  
Do not allow children to touch the power cord, cables, inter-  
nal gears, or electrical parts.  
• Close the feeder gently so as not to catch your hand. This  
may result in personal injury.  
• The laser beam can be harmful to human bodies. The laser  
beam is confined in the laser scanner unit by a cover, so  
there is no danger of the laser beam escaping during normal  
machine operation. Read the following remarks and instruc-  
tions for safety.  
• If the machine makes an unusual noise or emits smoke,  
heat, or an unusual smell, immediately turn off the power  
switches of the machine and computer and disconnect the  
interface cable if it is connected. Then, unplug the power  
plug from the AC power outlet and contact your local au-  
thorized Canon dealer. Continued use can result in a fire or  
electrical shock.  
- Never open covers other than those indicated in this  
manual.  
- Do not remove the caution label attached to the cover of  
the laser scanner unit.  
• Do not use flammable sprays near the machine. If flammable  
substances come into contact with electrical parts inside the  
machine, this may result in a fire or electrical shock.  
• Always turn off the power switches of the machine and com-  
puter, and then unplug the power plug and interface cables  
before moving the machine. Failure to do so can damage  
the cables or cords, resulting in a fire or electrical shock.  
• Confirm that the power plug or power connecter is inserted  
completely after moving the machine. Failure to do so can  
result in an overheating and fire.  
• Do not drop paper clips, staples, or other metal objects  
inside the machine. Also, do not spill water, liquids, or other  
flammable substances (alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, etc.)  
inside the machine. If these items come into contact with  
a high-voltage area inside the machine, this may result in a  
fire or electrical shock. If these items are dropped or spilled  
inside the machine, immediately turn off the power switches  
of the machine and computer and disconnect the interface  
cable if it is connected. Then, unplug the power plug from  
the AC power outlet and contact your local authorized  
Canon dealer.  
- If the laser beam should escape and enter your eyes, expo-  
sure may cause damage to your eyes.  
• If you operate this machine in manners other than the  
control, adjustment, and operating procedures prescribed in  
this manual, this may result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
• This machine is confirmed as the class 1 laser product in  
IEC60825-1:2007.  
• When plugging or unplugging a USB cable when the power  
plug is plugged into an AC power outlet, do not touch the  
metal part of the connector, as this can result in electrical  
shock.  
Maintenance and Inspections  
WARNING  
• When cleaning the machine, turn off the machine and  
computer, and unplug the interface cables and power plug.  
Failure to do so can result in a fire or electrical shock.  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• Unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet periodi-  
cally and clean the area around the base of the power plug's  
metal pins and the AC power outlet with a dry cloth to  
remove all dust and grime. In damp, dusty, or smoky loca-  
tions, dust can build up around the power plug and become  
damp, which can cause a short circuit, resulting in a fire.  
• Clean the machine with a well wrung out cloth dampened  
with water or mild detergent diluted with water. Do not  
use alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, or other flammable  
substances. If flammable substances come into contact with  
electrical parts inside the machine, this may result in a fire or  
electrical shock.  
• When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the  
inside of the machine, do not expose yourself to the heat  
emitted from the fixing unit and its surroundings for a pro-  
longed period of time. Doing so may result in low tempera-  
ture burns, even though you did not touch the fixing unit  
and its surroundings directly, as this may result in burns.  
• Some areas inside the machine are subject to high voltage.  
When removing jammed paper or when inspecting inside  
of the machine, be careful not to allow necklaces, bracelets,  
or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as  
this can result in burns or electrical shock.  
• Do not dispose of used toner cartridges in open flames.  
This may cause the toner remaining inside the cartridges to  
ignite, resulting in burns or fire.  
• If paper is jammed, remove the jammed paper so that any  
pieces of paper do not remain inside the machine accord-  
ing to the displayed message. Also, do not put your hand  
in an area other than indicated areas, as this may result in  
personal injuries or burns.  
• Confirm that the power plug or power connecter is inserted  
completely after cleaning the machine. Failure to do so can  
result in an overheating and fire.  
• When removing jammed paper or replacing a toner  
cartridge, be careful not to get any toner on your hands or  
clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If toner  
gets on your hands or clothing, wash them immediately  
with cold water. Washing with warm water sets the toner,  
making it impossible to remove the toner stains.  
• Check the power cord and plug regularly. The following  
conditions may result in fire, so please contact your local  
authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.  
- There are burn marks on the power plug.  
- The blade on the power plug is deformed or broken.  
• When removing jammed paper, be careful not to allow the  
toner on the paper to scatter. The toner may get into your  
eyes or mouth. If toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash  
them immediately with cold water and consult a physician.  
- The power is turned OFF or ON when bending the power  
cord.  
- The coating of the power cord is damaged, cracked, or  
dented.  
• When loading paper or removing jammed documents or  
paper, be careful not to cut your hands with the edges of the  
paper.  
- A part of the power cord becomes hot.  
• Check regularly that the power cord and plug are not han-  
dled in the following manner. Failure to do so can result in a  
fire or electrical shock.  
• When removing a toner cartridge, remove the toner car-  
tridge carefully so as to prevent the toner from scattering  
and getting into your eyes or mouth. If toner gets into your  
eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and  
consult a physician.  
- The power connector is loosened.  
- Stress is being applied to the power cord by a heavy ob-  
ject or by fixing it with staples.  
• Do not attempt to disassemble the toner cartridge. The  
toner may scatter and get into your eyes or mouth. If toner  
gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with  
cold water and consult a physician.  
- The power plug is loosened.  
- The power cord is tied in a bundle.  
- A part of the power cord is put in an aisle.  
- The power cord is put in front of the heating appliance.  
• If toner leaks from the toner cartridge, be careful not to  
inhale the toner or allow it to come into direct contact with  
your skin. If the toner comes into contact with your skin,  
wash with soap. If the skin becomes irritated or you inhale  
the toner, consult a physician immediately.  
CAUTION  
• The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the machine  
become hot during use. When removing jammed paper or  
when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not touch the  
fixing unit and its surroundings, as this may result in burns.  
Consumables  
WARNING  
• Do not dispose of used toner cartridges in open flames. This  
may cause the toner to ignite, resulting in burns or fire.  
• Do not store toner cartridges or paper in a location exposed  
to open flames. This may cause the toner or paper to ignite,  
resulting in burns or fire.  
• When disposing of a toner cartridge, place the toner  
cartridge into a bag to prevent the toner from scattering,  
and then dispose of the toner cartridge according to local  
regulations.  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CAUTION  
• Keep the toner cartridges and other consumables out of  
the reach of small children. If the toner or other parts are  
ingested, consult a physician immediately.  
• Do not attempt to disassemble the toner cartridge. The  
toner may scatter and get into your eyes or mouth. If toner  
gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with  
cold water and consult a physician.  
• If toner leaks from the toner cartridge, be careful not to  
inhale the toner or allow it to come into direct contact with  
your skin. If the toner comes into contact with your skin,  
wash with soap. If the skin becomes irritated or you inhale  
the toner, consult a physician immediately.  
• Do not pull out the sealing tape forcefully or stop at mid-  
point, as this may cause toner to spill out. If toner gets into  
your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water  
and consult a physician.  
Others  
WARNING  
• If you are using a cardiac pacemaker  
This machine generates a low level magnetic field. If you  
use a cardiac pacemaker and feel abnormalities, please  
move away from this machine and consult your physician  
immediately.  
Telephone Equipment  
When using telephone equipment, basic safety precautions  
should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric  
shock, and injury to persons, including the following:  
1. Do not use this machine near water (i.e., near a bathtub,  
kitchen sink, or laundry tub), or in a wet basement or near a  
swimming pool.  
2. Avoid using the telephone during an electrical storm, as  
there may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.  
3. Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity  
of the leak.  
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installation Requirements and Handling  
In order to use this machine in a safe and trouble-free manner, install the machine in a place that fulfills the following conditions.  
Also, read the remarks carefully.  
Temperature and Humidity Conditions  
Installation Requirements  
• Temperature range: 50 to 86°F (10 to 30°C)  
• A location with sufficient space  
• Humidity range: 20 to 80 % RH (no condensation)  
• A location with good ventilation  
• A location with a flat, even surface  
IMPORTANT  
• A location able to fully support the weight of the machine  
Protecting the machine from condensation  
• To prevent condensation from forming inside the machine  
in the following cases, let the machine adjust to the ambient  
temperature and humidity for at least two hours before use.  
IMPORTANT  
Do not install the machine in the following locations, as  
this may result in damage to the machine.  
- When the room where the machine is installed is heated  
rapidly  
• A location subject to dramatic changes in temperature or  
humidity  
- When the machine is moved from a cool or dry location to  
a hot or humid location  
• A location subject to condensation  
• A poorly ventilated location  
• If water droplets (condensation) form inside the machine,  
this can result in paper jams or poor print quality.  
(If you use the machine for a long time or to perform a large  
amount of printing in a poorly ventilated room, the ozone  
or other odors generated by the machine may create an  
uncomfortable working environment. In addition, chemical  
particles are dispersed during printing; therefore, it is impor-  
tant to provide adequate ventilation.)  
When using an ultrasonic humidifier  
When you are using an ultrasonic humidifier, it is therefore  
recommended that you use purified water or other water that  
is free of impurities.  
If you use tap water or well water, impurities in the water will  
be dispersed through the air. This can be trapped inside the  
machine, causing degradation in print quality.  
• A location near equipment that generates magnetic or elec-  
tromagnetic waves  
• A laboratory or location where chemical reactions occur  
• A location exposed to salt air, corrosive gases, or toxic gases  
• A location, such as on a carpet or mat, that may warp from  
the weight of the machine or where the machine is liable to  
sink  
Power Supply Requirements  
120 to 127 V 60 Hz  
IMPORTANT  
Installation Space  
Required installation space  
Precautions when connecting the power cord  
• Do not connect this machine to an uninterruptible power  
source.  
MF8350Cdn  
• Use an AC power outlet exclusively for the machine. Do not  
use the other sockets of the AC power outlet.  
in. (mm)  
Front View  
52 1/4 (1327)  
Feeder cover  
Feeder  
• Do not plug the power plug into the auxiliary outlet on a  
computer.  
Do not use the same AC power outlet for both the machine  
and any of the following equipment.  
Paper  
cassette  
4
4
(100)  
(100)  
- Copy machine  
Rear cover  
- Air conditioner  
- Shredder  
- Equipment that consumes a large amount of electricity  
- Equipment that generates electrical noise  
MF8050Cn  
in. (mm)  
Front View  
• When unplugging the power cord, keep interval of 5 sec-  
onds or more before plugging it again.  
48 3/8 (1229)  
Feeder cover  
Paper  
cassette  
Feeder  
4
4
Miscellaneous precautions  
(100)  
(100)  
• The maximum power consumption of the machine is as  
follows.  
- MF8350Cdn: 1,200 W or less  
- MF8050Cn: 900 W or less  
Rear cover  
• Electrical noise or a dramatic drop in mains voltage may  
cause the machine or computer to operate incorrectly or  
lose data.  
xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Inspections  
IMPORTANT  
• Follow the instructions in the caution label attached to this  
machine.  
• Avoid shaking or applying a shock to this machine.  
• To prevent the paper jam, do not turn the power ON/OFF,  
open/close the operation panel or rear cover, and load/un-  
load paper in the middle of printing operation.  
• Be sure to remove the toner cartridge from the machine  
when transporting the machine.  
• To avoid exposing the toner cartridge to light, place it in the  
protective bag included with this machine or wrap it in a  
thick cloth.  
• Clean this machine regularly. If this machine becomes dusty,  
it may operate improperly.  
• Use a modular cable of 3 m or shorter in length.  
• Depending on your locale or your telephone connection,  
you may be unable to perform data communication. In this  
case, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the  
Canon help line.  
• The repairing parts and toner cartridges for the machine will  
be available for at least seven (7) years after production of  
this machine model has been discontinued.  
Customer Support  
Customer Support (U.S.A.)  
Your machine is designed with the latest technology to pro-  
vide trouble-free operation. If you encounter a problem with  
the machine's operation, try to solve it by using the informa-  
tion in Chapter 9. If you cannot solve the problem or if you  
think your machine needs servicing, contact Canon Customer  
Care Center at 1-800-OK-CANON between the hours of 8:00  
A.M. to 8:00 P.M. EST Monday through Friday. On-line support  
for 24 hours is also available at the website.  
http://www.canontechsupport.com/  
Customer Support (Canada)  
Canon Canada Inc., offers a full range of customer technical  
support options*:  
• For step-by-step troubleshooting, e-mail technical support,  
the latest driver or document downloads, and answers to  
frequently asked questions, visit http://www.canon.ca/  
• Free live technical support 9 A.M. to 8 P.M. EST Monday  
through Friday (excluding holidays) for products still under  
warranty 1-800-OK-CANON  
• For the location of the authorized service facility nearest  
you, visit http://www.canon.ca/ or 1-800-OK-CANON  
• If the problem cannot be corrected by using one of the  
above technical support options, repair options are available  
at the time of your call to the live technical support number  
above or via the website at http://www.canon.ca/  
* Support program specifics are subject to change without  
notice.  
xii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Legal Notices  
(2) Rights holders of the SOFTWARE retain in all respects the  
title, ownership and intellectual property rights in and to  
the SOFTWARE. Except as expressly provided herein, no  
license or right, expressed or implied, is hereby conveyed or  
granted by rights holders of the SOFTWARE to you for any  
intellectual property of rights holders of the SOFTWARE.  
International ENERGY STAR Program  
As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, Canon U.S.A., Inc.  
has determined that this product meets the  
ENERGY STAR Program for energy efficiency.  
The International ENERGY STAR Office Equip-  
ment Program is an international program that  
promotes energy saving through the use of  
computers and other office equipment.  
(3) You may use the SOFTWARE solely for use with the Canon  
product you purchased (the “PRODUCT”).  
(4) You may not assign, sublicense, market, distribute, or trans-  
fer the SOFTWARE to any third party without prior written  
consent of rights holders of the SOFTWARE.  
The program backs the development and  
dissemination of products with functions that  
effectively reduce energy consumption. It is an  
open system in which business proprietors can  
participate voluntarily.  
(5) Notwithstanding the foregoing, you may transfer the  
SOFTWARE only when (a) you assign all of your rights to the  
PRODUCT and all rights and obligations under the condi-  
tions to transferee and (b) such transferee agrees to be  
bound by all these conditions.  
The targeted products are office equipment,  
such as computers, displays, printers, facsimi-  
les, and copiers. The standards and logos are  
uniform among participating nations.  
(6) You may not decompile, reverse engineer, disassemble or  
otherwise reduce the code of the SOFTWARE to human  
readable form.  
(7) You may not modify, adapt, translate, rent, lease or loan the  
SOFTWARE or create derivative works based on the SOFT-  
WARE.  
IPv6 Ready Logo  
The machine uses the operating system which  
obtained IPv6 Ready Logo Phase-1 defined by  
IPv6 Forum.  
(8) You are not entitled to remove or make separate copies of  
the SOFTWARE from the PRODUCT.  
(9) The human-readable portion (the source code) of the SOFT-  
WARE is not licensed to you.  
B. Notwithstanding A above, in case the other conditions  
accompany third-party software modules , these software  
modules are subject to the other conditions.  
Trademarks  
Canon, the Canon logo, and Color imageCLASS are registered  
trademarks of Canon Inc. in the United States and may also be  
trademarks or registered trademarks in other countries.  
Microsoft, Windows and Windows Vista are either trademarks  
or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the  
United States and/or other countries.  
The Software Subjected to the Other Conditions  
Please refer to eManual on a CD-ROM bundled with this prod-  
uct, for more detail and corresponding license conditions.  
All other product and brand names are registered trademarks,  
trademarks or service marks of their respective owners.  
Disclaimers  
Copyright  
The information in this document is subject to change without  
notice.  
© 2010 by Canon Inc. All rights reserved.  
CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH RE-  
GARD TO THIS MATERIAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, EXCEPT  
AS PROVIDED HEREIN, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION,  
THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY, MERCHANT-  
ABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE OR  
NON-INFRINGEMENT. CANON INC. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR  
ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF  
ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE  
USE OF THIS MATERIAL.  
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted,  
transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any  
language or computer language in any form or by any means,  
electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or  
otherwise, without the prior written permission of Canon Inc.  
Third Party Software  
A. This product includes third-party software modules. Use and  
distribution of this software modules (the “SOFTWARE”) are  
subject to conditions (1) through (9) below.  
For CA, USA only  
(1) You agree that you will comply with any applicable export  
control laws, restrictions or regulations of the countries  
involved in the event that this product including the SOFT-  
WARE is shipped, transferred or exported into any country.  
Included battery contains Perchlorate Material - special han-  
dling may apply.  
See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/ for  
details.  
xiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Canon U.S.A., Inc.  
Legal Limitations on the Usage of Your Product and the Use of Images  
One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A.  
TEL No. 1-800-OK-CANON  
Using your product to scan, print or otherwise reproduce  
certain documents, and the use of such images as scanned,  
printed or otherwise reproduced by your product, may be pro-  
hibited by law and may result in criminal and/or civil liability.  
Users in the U.S.A.  
A non-exhaustive list of these documents is set forth below.  
This list is intended to be a guide only. If you are uncertain  
about the legality of using your product to scan, print or oth-  
erwise reproduce any particular document, and/or of the use  
of the images scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced, you  
should consult in advance with your legal advisor for guidance.  
Pre-Installation Requirements for Canon Facsimile Equipment  
A. Location  
Supply a suitable table, cabinet, or desk for the machine.  
See Chapter 11, “Appendix,”for specific dimensions and  
weight.  
• Paper Money  
• Money Orders  
• Certificates of Deposit  
B. Order Information  
• Postage Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)  
• Identifying Badges or Insignias  
• Selective Service or Draft Papers  
• Checks or Drafts Issued by Governmental Agencies  
• Motor Vehicle Licenses and Certificates of Title  
• Travelers Checks  
• Food Stamps  
• Passports  
• Immigration Papers  
• Internal Revenue Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)  
• Bonds or Other Certificates of Indebtedness  
• Stock Certificates  
• Copyrighted Works/Works of Art without Permission of  
Copyright Owner  
1. A single telephone line (touch-tone or rotary) should be  
used.  
2. Order an RJ11-C telephone wall jack (USOC), which  
should be installed by the telephone company. If the  
RJ11-C wall jack is not present, telephone/facsimile op-  
eration is not possible.  
3. Order a normal business line from your telephone  
company’s business representative. The line should be  
a regular voice grade line or an equivalent one. Use one  
line per unit.  
DDD (Direct Distance Dial) line  
-or-  
IDDD (International Direct Distance Dial) line if you com-  
municate overseas  
FCC (Federal Communications Commission)  
Color imageCLASS MF8350Cdn: F157902  
NOTE  
Canon recommends an individual line following industry  
standards, i.e., 2,500 (touch-tone) or 500 (rotary/pulse dial)  
telephones. A dedicated extension off a PBX (Private Branch  
eXchange) unit without “Call Waiting”can be used with your  
facsimile unit. Key telephone systems are not recommended  
because they send nonstandard signals to individual tel-  
ephones for ringing and special codes, which may cause a  
facsimile error.  
Color imageCLASS MF8050Cn: F157802  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation  
is subject to the following two conditions:  
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference,  
and  
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including  
interference that may cause undesired operation.  
C. Power Requirements  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the  
limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC  
Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protec-  
tion against harmful interference in a residential installation.  
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequen-  
cy energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the  
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio com-  
munications. However, there is no guarantee that interference  
will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does  
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,  
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and  
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by  
one or more of the following measures:  
The machine should be connected to a standard 120 volt  
AC, three-wire grounded outlet only.  
Do not connect this machine to an outlet or power line  
shared with other appliances that cause "electrical noise.”  
Air conditioners, electric typewriters, copiers, and machines  
of this sort generate electrical noise that often interferes  
with communications equipment and the sending and  
receiving of documents.  
Connection of the Equipment  
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and  
the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the rear panel of  
this equipment is a label that contains, among other informa-  
tion, a product identifier in the format of US:AAAEQ##TXXXX.  
If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone  
company.  
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
• Increase the separation between the equipment and re-  
ceiver.  
• Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different  
from that to which the receiver is connected.  
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for  
help.  
Use of shielded cable is required to comply with class B limits  
in Subpart B of Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Do not make any  
changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise  
specified in this manual. If you make such changes or modifica-  
tions, you could be required to stop operation of the equip-  
ment.  
The REN (Ringer Equivalence Number) is used to determine the  
number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line.  
Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices  
not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not  
all areas, the sum of the RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To  
be certain of the number of devices that may be connected  
to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local  
xiv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
telephone company. The REN for this product is part of the  
product identifier that has the format US: AAAEQ##TXXXX. The  
digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point  
(e.g., 10 is a REN of 1.0).  
Users in Canada  
Pre-Installation Requirements for Canon Facsimile Equipment  
A. Location  
An FCC compliant telephone line cable and modular plug is  
provided with this equipment. This equipment is designed to  
be connected to the telephone network or premise wiring us-  
ing a compatible modular jack that is Part 68 compliant.  
Supply a suitable table, cabinet, or desk for the machine.  
See Chapter 11, “Appendix,”for specific dimensions and  
weight.  
B. Order Information  
This equipment may not be used on coin service provided by  
the telephone company. Connection to party lines is subjected  
to state tariffs.  
1. A single telephone line (touch-tone or rotary) should be  
used.  
2. Order a CA11A modular jack, which should be installed  
by the telephone company. If the CA11A jack is not  
present, installation cannot occur.  
In Case of Equipment Malfunction  
Should any malfunction occur which cannot be corrected  
by the procedures described in this guide or the e-Manual,  
disconnect the equipment from the telephone line cable and  
disconnect the power cord.  
3. Order a normal business line from your telephone  
company’s business representative. The line should be  
a regular voice grade line or an equivalent one. Use one  
line per unit.  
The telephone line cable should not be reconnected or the  
main power switch turned ON until the problem is completely  
resolved. Users should contact Canon Authorized Service  
Facilities for servicing of equipment, Information regarding  
Authorized Service Facility locations can be obtained by calling  
Canon Customer Care Center (1-800-OK-CANON).  
DDD (Direct Distance Dial) line  
-or-  
IDDD (International Direct Distance Dial) line if you com-  
municate overseas  
NOTE  
Rights of the Telephone Company  
Canon recommends an individual line following industry  
standards, i.e., 2,500 (touch-tone) or 500 (rotary/pulse dial)  
telephones. A dedicated extension off a PBX (Private Branch  
eXchange) unit without “Call Waiting”can be used with your  
facsimile unit. Key telephone systems are not recommended  
because they send nonstandard signals to individual tel-  
ephones for ringing and special codes, which may cause a  
facsimile error.  
If this equipment (Color imageCLASS MF8350Cdn/MF8050Cn)  
causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone  
company may temporarily disconnect service. The telephone  
company also retains the right to make changes in facilities  
and services that may affect the operation of this equipment.  
When such changes are necessary, the telephone company is  
required to give adequate prior notice to the user.  
However, if advance notice is not possible, the telephone  
company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also,  
the customer will be advised of his/her right to file a complaint  
with the FCC if he/she believes it is necessary.  
C. Power Requirements  
The power outlet should be a three-prong grounded re-  
ceptacle (Single or Duplex). It should be independent from  
copiers, heaters, air conditioners, or any electric equipment  
that is thermostatically controlled. The rated value is 115  
volts and 15 amperes. The CA11A modular jack should be  
relatively close to the power outlet to facilitate installation.  
WARNING  
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it  
unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic  
device, including FAX machines, to send any message unless  
such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom  
of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmis-  
sion, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the  
business or other entity, or other individual sending the mes-  
sage and the telephone number of the sending machine or  
such business, other entity, or individual.  
Notice  
• This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical  
specifications.  
• The Ringer Equivalence Number is an indication of the  
maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to  
a telephone interface. The termination of an interface may  
consist of any combination of devices subject only to the  
requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does  
not exceed five.  
(The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or  
any other number for which charges exceed local or long-dis-  
tance transmission charges.)  
• The REN of this product is 1.0.  
• Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that  
it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local  
telecommunications company. The equipment must also  
be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In  
some cases, the company’s inside wiring associated with a  
single line individual service may be extended by means of  
a certified connector assembly (telephone extension cord).  
The customer should be aware that compliance with the  
above conditions may not prevent deterioration of service in  
some situations.  
NOTE  
In order to program this information into your machine, you  
should complete the procedure for registering your name,  
unit’s telephone number, time, and date in the Starter Guide.  
• Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an  
authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by  
the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to  
this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the  
telecommunications company cause to request the user to  
disconnect the equipment.  
xv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Users should ensure for their own protection that the elec-  
trical ground connections of the power utility, telephone  
lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are  
connected together. This precaution may be particularly  
important in rural areas.  
Remarques  
• Le présent matériel est conforme aux spécifications tech-  
niques applicables d’Industrie Canada.  
• Avant d’installer cet appareil, l’utilisateur doit s’assurer qu’il  
est permis de le connecter à l’équipement de la compagnie  
de télécommunication locale et doit installer cet appareil  
en utilisant une méthode de connexion autorisée. Il se  
peut qu’il faille étendre la circuiterie intérieure de la ligne  
individuelle d’abonné, qui a été installée par la compagnie,  
au moyen d’un jeu de connecteurs homologués (rallonge  
téléphonique).  
CAUTION  
Users should not attempt to make such connections them-  
selves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection  
authority, or electrician, as appropriate.  
• L’attention de l’utilisateur est attirée sur le fait que le respect  
des conditions mentionnées ci-dessus ne constitue pas une  
garantie contre les dégradations de qualité du service dans  
certaines circonstances.  
NOTE  
This equipment complies with the Canadian ICES-003 Class B  
limits.  
• L’indice d’équivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert à indiquer  
le nombre maximal de terminaux qui peuvent être rac-  
cordés à une interface téléphonique. La terminaison d’une  
interface peut consister en une combinaison quelconque  
de dispositifs, à la seule condition que la somme d’indices  
d’équivalence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n’excède  
pas 5.  
Utilisation au Canada  
Conditions à Remplir Préalablement à L’installation d’un  
Télécopieur Canon  
A. Emplacement  
• Le nombre d’équivalents sonnerie (REN) de ce produit est  
1,0.  
Prévoir une table, un meuble, ou un bureau suffisamment  
solide et de taille appropriée (voir le chapitre 11, Annexe  
(Appendix), pour les indications de poids et dimensions).  
• Les réparations sur un appareil certifié doivent être faites  
par une société d’entretien canadienne autorisée par le Gou-  
vernement canadien et désignée par le fournisseur. Toute  
réparation ou modification que pourrait faire I’utilisateur de  
cet appareil, ou tout mauvais fonctionnement, donne à la  
compagnie de télécommunication le droit de débrancher  
I’appareil.  
• Pour sa propre protection, I’utilisateur doit s’assurer que les  
prises de terre de I’appareil d’alimentation, les lignes télé-  
phoniques et les tuyaux métalliques internes, s’il y en a, sont  
bien connectés entre eux. Cette précaution est particulière-  
ment importante dans les zones rurales  
B. Installation téléphonique  
1. Une seule ligne téléphonique (tonalités ou impulsions)  
doit être utilisée.  
2. Il faut commander un jack modulaire CA11A qui sera  
installé par la compagnie téléphonique. Sans ce jack, la  
mise en place serait impossible.  
3. Si vous vous abonnez à une nouvelle ligne, demandez  
une ligne d’affaires normale de qualité téléphonique  
courante ou équivalente. Prenez un abonnement d’une  
ligne par appareil.  
CAUTION  
Au lieu d’essayer de faire ces branchements eux-mêmes, les  
utilisateurs sont invités à faire appel à un service d’inspection  
faisant autorité en matière d’électricité ou à un électricien,  
selon le cas.  
Ligne automatique interurbaine  
ou  
Ligne automatique internationale (si vous communiquez  
avec les pays étrangers)  
NOTE  
NOTE  
Respecte les limites de la classe B de la NMB-003 du Canada.  
Canon vous conseille d’utiliser une ligne individuelle conforme  
aux normes industrielles, à savoir:  
ligne téléphonique 2,500 (pour appareil à clavier) ou 500  
(pour appareil à cadran/impulsions). Il est également possi-  
ble de raccorder ce télécopieur à un système téléphonique à  
poussoirs car la plupart de ces systèmes émettent des signaux  
d’appel non normalisés ou des codes spéciaux qui risquent de  
perturber le fonctionnement du télécopieur.  
C. Condition d’alimentation  
Raccordez le télécopieur à une prise de courant plus terre à  
trois branches, du type simple ou double, et qui ne sert pas  
à alimenter un copieur, un appareil de chauffage, un clima-  
tiseur ou tout autre appareil électrique à thermostat.  
L’alimentation doit être de 115 volts et 15 ampères. Pour  
faciliter l’installation, le jack CA11A doit être assez proche  
de la prise de courant.  
xvi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Laser Safety  
This machine complies with 21 CFR Chapter 1 Subchapter J as  
a Class 1 laser product under the U.S. Department of Health  
and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard  
according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of  
1968. This means that the machine does not produce hazard-  
ous radiation.  
Since radiation emitted inside the machine is completely  
confined within protective housings and external covers, the  
laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase  
of user operation.  
CDRH Regulations  
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the  
U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented regulations  
for laser products on August 2, 1976. These regulations apply  
to laser products manufactured from August 1, 1976. Compli-  
ance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States.  
CAUTION  
Use of controls, adjustments, or performance of procedures  
other than those specified in this manual may result in hazard-  
ous radiation exposure.  
The label is attached to the laser scanner machine inside the  
machine and is not in a user access area.  
xvii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
xviii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
1
Before Using the Machine  
This category describes the features of the machine and its useful functions.  
Names and Functions on Each Part of the Machine1-2  
Front Side  
1-2  
1-3  
1-4  
1-5  
1-6  
1-7  
1-7  
Back Side  
Interior  
Multi-purpose Tray (Manual Feed Slot)  
Paper Cassette  
Operation Panel  
Main Operation Panel  
Fax Operation Panel  
1-8  
LCD (Standby Mode)  
Copy Mode  
1-9  
1-9  
1-9  
1-9  
Fax Mode  
Scan Mode  
Text Input Method  
1-10  
Changing Entry Mode  
1-10  
1-10  
1-10  
1-10  
Entering Letters and Symbols  
Moving the Cursor (Entering a Space)  
Deleting Characters  
Setting the Sleep Timer  
1-11  
1-12  
Setting the Current Date and Time  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Names and Functions on Each Part of the Machine  
This section describes the parts and functions of the machine.  
Front Side  
ꢀ MF8350Cdn  
(1)  
(7)  
(8)  
(9)  
(2)  
(16)  
(17)  
(3)  
(4)  
(14)  
(15)  
(10)  
(11)  
(5)  
(6)  
(12)  
(13)  
(18)  
(13)  
ꢀ MF8050Cn  
(1)  
(2)  
(7)  
(8)  
(9)  
(16)  
(17)  
(14)  
(3)  
(4)  
(13)  
(13)  
(15)  
(11)  
(12)  
(10)  
(5)  
(6)  
(18)  
(1) Document guides  
(9) Document delivery tray  
Adjust to the width of the document.  
Documents are output.  
(2) Feeder  
(10) Power switch  
The feeder can automatically scan documents continuously.  
Turns the power ON or OFF.  
(3) Operation panel  
(11) Ventilation slots  
(12) Speaker  
Controls the machine.  
"Operation Panel" (→P.1-7)  
(13) Lift handles  
(4) Front cover  
(14) Scanning area  
(5) Multi-purpose tray (manual feed slot)  
Use the tray when printing from the tray.  
Scans documents from the feeder.  
(15) Output tray  
"Multi-purpose Tray (Manual Feed Slot)" (→P.1-5)  
Printed paper such as copies, prints and faxes come out from  
(6) Paper cassette  
Load the paper supply.  
"Paper Cassette" (→P.1-6)  
the output tray.  
(16) Platen glass  
Place document.  
(7) Document feeder tray  
(17) USB memory port  
Place document.  
Used to save scanned documents in a USB memory.  
(18) Manual feed transport guide  
(8) Tray extension  
Pull out the tray extension when the paper is hanging out of the  
document feeder tray such as Legal size paper.  
1-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Back Side  
ꢀ MF8350Cdn  
(1)  
(2)  
(5)  
(6)  
(7)  
(8)  
(3) (4)  
ꢀ MF8050Cn  
(1)  
(2)  
(4)  
(5)  
(3)  
(8)  
(7)  
(6)  
(1) USB port  
(5) Rear cover  
Connect the USB cable.  
Open this cover when clearing paper jams.  
(2) LAN port  
(6) Rating label  
Connect the LAN cable.  
The current value indicated in this rating label shows the  
average power current consumption.  
(3) Telephone line jack  
Connect the telephone cable.  
(7) Ventilation slots  
(8) Power socket  
(4) External telephone jack  
Connect the external telephone.  
Connect the power cord.  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Interior  
ꢀ MF8350Cdn  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
(5)  
ꢀ MF8050Cn  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
(5)  
(1) Y (Yellow) toner cartridge slot  
(4) K (Black) toner cartridge slot  
The Y (yellow) toner cartridge is installed in this slot.  
The K (black) toner cartridge is installed in this slot.  
(2) M (Magenta) toner cartridge slot  
(5) Toner cartridge tray  
The M (magenta) toner cartridge is installed in this slot.  
Tray for installing the toner cartridges.  
(3) C (Cyan) toner cartridge slot  
The C (cyan) toner cartridge is installed in this slot.  
1-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Multi-purpose Tray (Manual Feed Slot)  
ꢀ MF8350Cdn  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
ꢀ MF8050Cn  
(1)  
(1) Paper guides  
(3) Tray extension (MF8350Cdn Only)  
Adjust to the width of the paper.  
Open to prevent the paper from hanging out of the multi-  
purpose tray when loading long-size paper such as Letter.  
(2) The auxiliary tray (MF8350Cdn Only)  
Be sure to pull out this tray when loading paper in the multi-  
purpose tray.  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Paper Cassette  
ꢀ MF8350Cdn  
(2)  
(2)  
(3)  
(1)  
(1)  
ꢀ MF8050Cn  
(2)  
(2)  
(3)  
(1)  
(1) Lock release lever  
(3) Lock release lever (changing cassette size)  
When loading paper that is longer than A4 size, pull out the  
paper cassette while holding this lever.  
Hold this lever to slide the paper guides.  
(2) Paper guide  
When the paper cassette is inserted with it extended, the front  
side of the paper cassette is not flush with the front surface of  
the machine as shown in the figure.  
Adjust the position of the paper guides to the paper.  
Set the legal dust cover on the paper cassette.  
1-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Operation Panel  
Main Operation Panel  
ꢀ MF8350Cdn  
(1) (2) (3) (4)  
(5)  
(6) (7) (8) (9)  
(10)  
(11)  
(12)  
(21) (20) (19) (18) (17) (16) (15) (14) (13)  
ꢀ MF8050Cn  
(1) (2) (3) (4)  
(5)  
(6) (7) (8) (9)  
(10)  
(11)  
(12)  
(21) (20) (19) (18) (17) (16) (15) (14) (13)  
(1) Copy function keys  
(6) LCD  
• [N on 1] key  
Displays messages and operation status. Displays items, texts,  
Reduces multiple-page documents automatically to copy  
and numbers when you are specifying settings.  
them on one sheet of paper  
(7) Numeric keys/[*] key/[#] key  
• [Numeric] keys  
• [Collate] key  
When making multiple copies, collates them in page order.  
• [Enlarge/Reduce] key  
Enter letters and numbers.  
• [*] key  
Specify a copy ratio.  
Switches the entry mode of characters. When sending a fax,  
use this key to transmit the tone signal from the dial line.  
• [#] key  
• [2-sided] key (MF8350Cdn only)  
Specifies the settings for 2-sided printing.  
• [Frame Erase] key (MF8050Cn only)  
Specifies the settings for frame erasing when copying.  
Press to enter symbols.  
(8) [Report] key  
(2) [Image Quality] key/[Density] key  
Prints reports and lists. You can also specify whether to print a  
Specifies the image quality or density.  
report automatically.  
(3) [Menu] key  
(9) [Toner Gauge] key  
Specifies or registers various settings.  
Checks the remaining amount of toner.  
(4) [Status Monitor/Cancel] key  
Checks or cancels jobs. You can also check the status of the  
network and machine.  
(10) [Energy Saver] key  
Sets or cancels the Sleep mode manually. The key turns on  
green when the Sleep mode is set.  
(5) Mode switching keys  
(11) [ID] key  
Switches the mode to copy, fax, or scan.  
Press when setting the PIN mode.  
1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
(12) [Clear] key  
(18) [Back] key  
Deletes letters and numbers.  
Returns to the previous screen.  
(13) [Stop] key  
(19) [Error] indicator  
Cancels jobs.  
Blinks when an error occurs.  
(14) [Start] key  
(20) [Processing/Data] indicator  
Blinks during transmission and turns on when the machine has  
waiting jobs.  
[B & W] key  
Starts the copy/scan/fax operation in black and white.  
[Color] key  
(21) [Select Paper/Settings] key  
Registers a size and type of paper to be loaded in the paper  
cassette or multi-purpose tray.  
Starts the copy/scan operation in color.  
(15) [Reset] key  
Resets the settings. (Resets the copy/scan/fax mode to the  
[Paper Select] indicator  
standard mode.)  
The indicator for the selected cassette turns on.  
(16) [View Settings] key  
You can check the settings.  
(17)  
[
] / [ ] / [ ] / [ ] / [OK] key  
• [ ] key  
Selects an upper item or increases a value.  
• [ ] key  
Selects a lower item or decreases a value.  
• [ ] key  
Returns to the previous screen or moves the cursor.  
Decreases the volume of communication sound when pressed  
during the fax communication.  
• [ ] key  
Proceeds to the next screen or moves the cursor.  
Increases the volume of communication sound when pressed  
during the fax communication.  
• [OK] key  
Confirms specified or registered settings.  
Fax Operation Panel  
ꢀ MF8350Cdn  
ꢀ MF8050Cn  
(1)  
(1) (2) (3)  
(1)  
(1) (2) (3)  
(6) (5) (4)  
(6) (5) (4)  
(1) [One-touch Speed Dial] keys  
(4) [Coded Dial] key  
Specifies recipients registered under one-touch keys.  
Specifies recipients registered under coded dial codes.  
(2) [Address Book] key  
(5) [Pause] key  
Searches recipients registered under one-touch keys or coded  
Adds pauses to fax numbers.  
dial codes.  
(6) [Hook] key  
Press when you want to dial without lifting up the handset of  
(3) [Redial] key  
Redials a number which you dialed the last time using the  
the external telephone.  
numeric keys.  
1-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ꢀ Fax menu screen  
LCD (Standby Mode)  
When the fax mode screen is displayed, you can select an item using [  
or [ ].  
]
This section describes the following screens.  
• Copy Mode  
• Fax Mode  
The currently selected item is displayed with white letters on a black  
background, and pressing [OK] proceeds to the next screen.  
• Scan Mode  
NOTE- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Display of the standby mode  
Specify destination.  
2010 01/01 12:52AM  
•
You can change the standby display which appears when the main  
power switch is turned ON.  
RX Mode: Auto  
Resolution: 200 x 1...  
e-Manual→ Basic Operation→ Customizing Settings→ Setting  
the Default Screen  
•
If the machine remains idle for 2 minutes, the display returns to the  
standby mode.  
Scan Mode  
ꢀ Scan mode screen  
e-Manual→ Basic Operation→ Specifying the Auto Reset Timer  
When using the scan function, press [  
standby display.  
] to switch to the  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
When the scan mode screen is displayed, you can select an item using  
] or [ ].  
Copy Mode  
[
ꢀ Copy mode screen  
The currently selected item is displayed with white letters on a black  
background, and pressing [OK] proceeds to the next screen.  
When using the copy function, press [  
standby display.  
] to switch to the  
Select the scan type.  
Copy: Press Start  
1
1
Computer  
Remote Scanner  
Memory Media  
100%  
Density: 0  
LTR  
+
-
Original Type: Text...  
2-Sided: Off  
ꢀ Copy menu screen  
When the copy mode screen is displayed, you can select an item using  
] or [ ].  
[
The currently selected item is displayed with white letters on a black  
background, and pressing [OK] proceeds to the next screen.  
Copy: Press Start  
1
1
100%  
Density:  
LTR  
0
+
-
Original Type: Text...  
2-Sided: Off  
Fax Mode  
ꢀ Fax mode screen  
When using the fax function, press [  
standby display.  
] to switch to the  
Specify destination.  
2010 01/01 12:52AM  
RX Mode: Auto  
Resolution: 200 x 1...  
1-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Enter information into the machine using the following keys.  
Text Input Method  
Moving the Cursor (Entering a Space)  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Move with [ ] or [ ].  
Move the cursor to the end of the text and press [ ] to enter a  
space.  
Deleting Characters  
Delete with [  
] (Clear).  
Pressing and holding [  
] (Clear) key deletes all characters.  
Example: Enter <CANON>.  
OK Tone, Numeric keys, Symbols, Clear  
Make sure that the input mode is <A>.  
1
Repeatedly press [  
] to enter "C".  
] to enter "A".  
] to enter "N".  
] to enter "O".  
] to enter "N".  
Changing Entry Mode  
2
3
4
5
6
Register Username  
C
<Apply>  
Register Username  
<Apply>  
Entry Mode: A  
Entry Mode: A  
Select <Entry Mode> with [ ], and then press [OK]. You can  
Repeatedly press [  
also press [  
] (Tone) to change the entry mode.  
Entry mode  
Available text  
Alphabet (capital letters) and symbols  
Alphabet (small letters) and symbols  
Numbers  
Register Username  
CA  
<Apply>  
<A>  
<a>  
Entry Mode: A  
<12>  
Entering Letters and Symbols  
Repeatedly press [  
Enter with the numeric keys or [  
] (Symbols)  
Keys used  
Entry mode: <A>  
Entry mode: <a>  
Entry mode: <12>  
Register Username  
CAN  
<Apply>  
@.-_/  
@.-_/  
abc  
def  
1
ABC  
DEF  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Entry Mode: A  
GHI  
ghi  
Repeatedly press [  
JKL  
jkl  
MNO  
PQRS  
TUV  
mno  
pqrs  
tuv  
Register Username  
CANO  
<Apply>  
Entry Mode: A  
WXYZ  
wxyz  
(Nonenterable text) (Nonenterable text)  
@ . / - _ ! ? & $ % #  
( ) [ ] { } < > * + =  
" , ; : ' ^ ` | \  
@ . / - _ ! ? & $ % #  
( ) [ ] { } < > * + =  
" , ; : ' ^ ` | \  
Repeatedly press [  
(Nonenterable text)  
Register Username  
CANON  
<Apply>  
Entry Mode: A  
[
]
, and then press [OK].  
Select <Apply> with  
The entry is applied.  
7
1-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setting the Sleep Timer  
The machine returns to sleep mode automatically when it is  
not operated for a certain time.  
Specify the time with [ ] or [ ], and then press  
[OK].  
4
5
Keys to be used for this operation  
You can also enter values using the numeric keys.  
Menu  
Sleep Timer  
10 minutes  
(10-240)  
Press [  
] (Menu) to close the menu screen.  
NOTE- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
When entering sleep mode  
OK  
[
] (Energy Saver) turns on green.  
To enter sleep mode manually  
Press [  
] (Energy Saver).  
Press [  
] (Menu).  
1
2
Situations where the machine does not enter sleep mode  
•
•
•
When the machine is in operation  
Select <Timer Settings> with [ ] or [ ], and  
then press [OK].  
When the Processing/Data indicator lights or blinks  
When a message appears on the display and the Error indicator  
blinks  
Menu  
•
•
•
When the machine is operating such as adjusting and cleaning  
When a paper jam occurs in the machine  
When the handset of the external telephone is off the hook  
Memory Media Settin...  
Send/Receive Settin...  
Printer Settings  
Timer Settings  
When the machine resumes from the sleep mode  
•
•
•
•
When pressing [  
] (Energy Saver).  
When printing starts after receiving a fax  
When the external telephone is off the hook  
When a print job is sent from a computer, and printing starts  
Select <Sleep Timer> with [ ] or [ ], and then  
press [OK].  
3
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Timer Settings  
Time & Date Settings  
Sleep Timer  
Auto Reset Timer  
Auto Offline Time  
1-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting the Current Date and Time  
Specify the display format of the date and time and set the  
current date and time.  
The specified date and time are used as the standard time for  
functions that require it.  
Settings  
Overview  
Operation  
Select a display format with [ ] or [ ], and then  
press [OK].  
You can select a display format from the  
following three options.  
Specifies  
the display  
format of  
date.  
<Date  
Display  
Type>  
Keys to be used for this operation  
•
•
•
YYYY MM/DD  
MM/DD/YYYY  
DD/MM YYYY  
Menu  
Select a display format with [ ] or [ ], and then  
press [OK].  
the display You can select a display format from the  
Specifies  
<12/24  
Hour  
Clock>  
format of  
time.  
following two options.  
•
•
12 Hour (AM/PM)  
24 Hour  
Use the numeric keys to enter the date and  
time, and then press [OK].  
Move the cursor with  
[
] or [  
].  
Switch between <AM> and <PM> with [ ] or [ ].  
Current Time Settings  
OK  
2010 01/01 12:52 AM  
Specifies  
the current  
time and  
date.  
Press [  
] (Menu).  
1
2
<Current  
Time  
Settings>  
Select <Timer Settings> with [ ] or [ ], and  
then press [OK].  
Menu  
Memory Media Settin...  
Send/Receive Settin...  
Printer Settings  
Timer Settings  
If you want to use the daylight saving time,  
perform the following procedure.  
1. Select <On> with [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK].  
2. Specify the starting date of the daylight  
saving time.  
- Select <Month> with [ ] or [ ], and then  
press [OK].  
Select <Time & Date Settings> with [ ] or [ ],  
and then press [OK].  
3
4
Timer Settings  
Time & Date Settings  
Sleep Timer  
Auto Reset Timer  
Auto Offline Time  
Specifies  
the daylight  
saving time.  
-
Select the starting month, and then press [OK].  
<Daylight  
Savings>  
- Select <Day> with [ ] or [ ], and then  
press [OK].  
-
Select the starting week, and then press [OK].  
- Select the starting day, and then press [OK].  
- Select <Apply> with [ ] or [ ], and then  
press [OK].  
3. Specify the ending date of the daylight  
saving time in the same way as you specified  
the starting date.  
Select a setting item with [ ] or [ ], and then  
press [OK].  
Time & Date Settings  
Date Display Type  
12/24 Hour Clock  
Current Time Settings  
Daylight Savings  
Press [  
] (Menu) to close the menu screen.  
5
1-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
2
Document and Paper Handling  
Documents Requirements  
Scanning Range  
2-2  
2-2  
Selecting Print Side (MF8350Cdn Only)  
2-19  
When setting this item to <Print Speed Priority>  
(the default setting)  
2-19  
2-19  
Copy  
2-2  
2-3  
2-3  
2-3  
When setting this item to <Print Side Priority>  
FAX  
Scan (Saving in a Computer)  
Scan (Saving in a USB Memory)  
Placing Documents  
2-4  
Placing Documents on the Platen Glass  
Loading Document in the Feeder  
2-4  
2-4  
Paper Requirements  
2-6  
Paper Size  
Paper Type  
2-6  
2-7  
Printable Range  
Loading Paper  
2-8  
2-9  
In the Paper Cassette  
2-9  
2-11  
2-12  
2-13  
2-13  
2-14  
In the Multi-Purpose Tray (for MF8350Cdn)  
In the Manual Feed Slot (for MF8050Cn)  
Precautions when Loading Paper  
Paper Loading Capacity  
Paper Loading Orientation  
When printing paper with a letterhead or logo  
(previously printed paper)  
2-14  
2-15  
Printing on Envelopes  
Setting a Paper Size and Type  
2-16  
For the Paper Cassette  
2-16  
Registering the Default Paper Settings for the Multi-purpose Tray  
(Manual Feed Slot)  
2-16  
2-17  
Registering a Custom Paper Size  
2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Documents Requirements  
Platen glass  
Feeder  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Plain paper  
Heavy paper  
Photograph  
Plain paper  
Document type  
(Multi-page documents of the same size, thickness and weight/one-  
page documents)  
Small documents (e.g., index cards)  
Special types of paper (e.g., tracing paper, transparencies, etc.)*1  
Booklet (Up to 3/4" (20 mm) thickness)  
Maximum 8 1/2" x 14" (215.9 mm x 355.6 mm)  
Minimum 5 1/2" x 5" (139.7 mm x 128 mm)  
12 to 28 lb Bond (50 to 105 g/m2)  
Maximum 50 sheets *2  
Size (W x L)  
Weight  
Maximum 8 1/2" x 11 3/4" (215.9 mm x 297 mm)  
Maximum 4.4 lb (2 kg)  
1 sheet  
Paper Capacity  
1
*
When copying transparent documents such as tracing paper or transparencies, use a piece of plain white paper to cover the document after placing it face-down on  
the platen glass.  
21 lb Bond (80 g/m2) paper  
2
*
IMPORTANT  
When placing document  
Place the document after glue, ink or correction fluid on the document is completely dry.  
To prevent paper jams in the feeder  
Do not use any of the following.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Wrinkled or creased paper  
Carbon paper or carbon-backed paper  
Curled or rolled paper  
Coated paper  
Torn paper  
Onion skin or thin paper  
Documents with staples or paper clips attached  
Paper printed with a thermal transfer printer  
Transparency  
Make sure your document's text and graphics fall  
within the shaded area in the following diagram.  
Scanning Range  
* Note that the margin widths listed below are rough standards and there may be slight variations in actual use.  
* The loading orientation of documents is as follows.  
- Platen glass: With the document facing down  
- Feeder: With the document loaded in the document feeder tray  
Copy  
Platen Glass  
Feeder  
1/8 in.  
(3 mm)  
1/8 in.  
(3 mm)  
1/8 in.  
(3 mm)  
1/8 in.  
(3 mm)  
1/8 in.  
1/8 in.  
(3 mm)  
(3 mm)  
1/8 in.  
1/8 in.  
(3 mm)  
(3 mm)  
2-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
FAX  
Platen Glass  
Feeder  
Feeder  
Feeder  
1/8 in.  
(3 mm)  
1/8 in.  
(3 mm)  
1/8 in.  
(3 mm)  
1/8 in.  
(3 mm)  
3/64 in.  
(1 mm)  
3/64 in.  
(1 mm)  
3/64 in.  
(1 mm)  
3/64 in.  
(1 mm)  
Scan (Saving in a Computer)  
Platen Glass  
1/16 in.  
(1.5 mm)  
Scan (Saving in a USB Memory)  
Platen Glass  
1/16 in.  
(1.5 mm)  
1/64 in.  
(0.5 mm)  
1/64 in.  
(0.5 mm)  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
This section describes placing the documents on  
the platen glass or loading them in the feeder.  
Placing Documents  
Placing Documents on the Platen Glass  
CAUTION  
Precautions when closing the feeder  
• Be careful not to get your fingers caught. This may cause  
Open the feeder.  
1
personal injury.  
• Do not press down the feeder forcefully. This may damage the  
platen glass and cause personal injury.  
Loading Document in the Feeder  
Spread the document guides a little wider than  
the actual document width.  
1
Place a document face down.  
2
3
Pull out the tray extension before loading the  
large size document.  
Pull out the tray extension when the document is hanging out of  
the document feeder tray.  
2
3
Align the document with the appropriate paper  
size marks.  
If your document does not match any of the paper size marks,  
align the center of your document with the arrow mark.  
Fan the document stack and even the edges.  
Thoroughly fan in  
small batches.  
Tap the edges on a flat  
surface a few times.  
Close the feeder gently.  
The machine is ready to scan the document.  
4
When scanning is complete, remove the document from the  
platen glass.  
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Neatly place the documents face up.  
4
5
Load the paper under the load limit guides (A).  
Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit  
mark (B).  
(A)  
(B)  
Align the document guides with the width of the  
document.  
The machine is ready to scan the document.  
IMPORTANT  
Be sure to align the document guides with the width of  
the paper  
If the document guides are too loose or too tight, this may result in  
misfeeds or paper jams.  
While scanning a document  
Do not add or remove documents.  
Scanning documents is complete  
Remove the documents from the document delivery tray to avoid  
paper jams.  
Avoid scanning the same document more than 30 times.  
When scanned repeatedly, documents can become folded or torn,  
which may cause paper jams.  
If the feeder rollers are soiled from scanning a document  
written in pencil  
Clean the feeder rollers.  
e-Manual → Maintenance → Cleaning the Scanning Area  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Paper Requirements  
Paper Size  
The available paper sizes are as follows.  
: Available  
{
Paper source  
Multi-purpose tray  
Paper size  
Paper cassette *1  
Manual feed slot  
A4 (8 1/4" x 11 3/4") (210.0 mm x 297.0 mm) *2 *3  
B5 (7 1/8" x 10 1/8") (182.0 mm x 257.0 mm) *2  
A5 (5 7/8" x 8 1/4") (148.0 mm x 210.0 mm)  
Legal (8 1/2" x 14") (215.9 mm x 355.6 mm) *2  
Letter (8 1/2" x 11") (215.9 mm x 279.4 mm) *2 *3  
Statement (5 1/2" x 8 1/2") (139.7 mm x 215.9 mm)  
Executive (7 1/4" x 10 1/2") (184.0 mm x 266.7 mm) *2  
Officio (8 1/2" x 12 1/2") (215.9 mm x 317.5 mm)  
B-officio (8 1/2" x 14") (215.9 mm x 355.6 mm)  
M-officio (8 1/2" x 13 3/8") (215.9 mm x 341 mm)  
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
Government - Letter (8" x 10 1/2") (203.2 mm x 266.7  
mm)  
{
{
Government - Legal (8" x 13") (203.2 mm x 330.2 mm)  
Foolscap (8 1/2" x 13") (215.9 mm x 330.2 mm) *2  
{
{
{
{
Envelope COM10 (4 1/8" x 9 1/2") (104.7 mm x 241.3  
mm) *4  
{
{
{
Envelope Monarch (3 7/8" x 7 1/2") (98.4 mm x 190.5  
mm) *4  
5
*
{
Envelope C5 (6 3/8" x 9") (162 mm x 229 mm) *4  
Envelope B5 (7" x 10") (176 mm x 250 mm) *4  
Envelope DL (4 3/8" x 8 5/8") (110 mm x 220 mm) *4  
Custom Paper Size  
{
{
{
{
{
{
6
7
*
{
*
{
1
*
*
*
*
*
*
Only in MF8350Cdn, available in the optional paper feeder  
Only in MF8350Cdn, auto 2-sided print is available.  
Received documents, reports, or lists can be printed.  
Use envelopes with the flap closed.  
You can load Envelope Monarch in the paper cassette only for MF8050Cn.  
You can load paper of the following custom paper sizes.  
* MF8350Cdn  
2
3
4
5
6
Width 4" to 8 1/2" (100 to 215.9 mm); Length 5 7/8" to 14" (148 to 355.6 mm)  
* MF8050Cn  
Width 3" to 8 1/2" (76.2 to 215.9 mm); Length 5" to 14" (127 to 355.6 mm)  
You can load paper of the following custom paper sizes.  
* Width 3" to 8 1/2" (76.2 to 215.9 mm); Length 5" to 14" (127 to 355.6 mm)  
7
*
NOTE- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Default paper size  
The default paper size is A4. If you use a different paper size, change the paper size settings.  
"Setting a Paper Size and Type" (→P.2-16)  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
2-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Paper Type  
The available paper types are as follows.  
Paper Source  
Paper Capacity  
(Multi-purpose Tray)  
(Manual Feed Slot)  
Paper Type  
Printer Driver Setting  
Paper Capacity  
(Paper Cassette)  
16 to 19 lb Bond (60 to 74  
[Plain 1]  
[Plain 2]  
g/m2)  
•
MF8350Cdn:  
19 to 24 lb Bond (70 to  
90 g/m2)  
•
•
MF8350Cdn: 250 sheets  
MF8050Cn: 150 sheets  
•
•
MF8350Cdn: 50 sheets  
MF8050Cn: 1 sheet  
Plain Paper *1  
•
MF8050Cn:  
20 to 24 lb Bond (75 to  
90 g/m2  
24 to 32 lb Bond (86 to 119  
g/m2)  
32 to 34 lb Bond (120 to  
128 g/m2)  
34 lb Bond to 60 lb Cover  
(129 to 163 g/m2)  
25 lb Bond to 45 lb Cover  
(91 to 120 g/m2)  
32 lb Bond to 60 lb Cover  
(121 to 163 g/m2)  
61 to 65 lb Cover (164 to  
176 g/m2)  
[Heavy 1]  
[Heavy 2]  
[Heavy 3]  
[Heavy 1]  
[Heavy 2]  
[Heavy 3]  
[Recycled]  
[Color]  
200 sheets  
150 sheets  
30 sheets  
20 sheets  
1 sheets  
1 sheets  
Heavy Paper *1  
(MF8350Cdn)  
120 sheets  
100 sheets  
Heavy Paper  
(MF8050Cn)  
16 to 19 lb Bond (60 to 74  
g/m2)  
16 to 19 lb Bond (60 to 74  
g/m2)  
•
•
•
•
MF8350Cdn: 250 sheets  
MF8050Cn: 150 sheets  
MF8350Cdn: 250 sheets  
MF8050Cn: 150 sheets  
•
•
•
•
MF8350Cdn: 50 sheets  
Recycled Paper *1  
Color Paper *1  
MF8050Cn: 1 sheet  
MF8350Cdn: 50 sheets  
MF8050Cn: 1 sheet  
28 to 29 lb Bond (100 to  
110 g/m2)  
32 to 35 lb Bond (120 to  
130 g/m2)  
40 lb Bond to 60 lb Cover  
(155 to 165 g/m2)  
77 to 80 lb Cover (210 to  
220 g/m2)  
[Glossy 1] *2  
[Glossy 2] *2  
[Glossy 3] *2  
[Glossy 4]  
[Transparency]  
[Labels]  
•
•
MF8350Cdn: 50 sheets  
MF8050Cn: 100 sheets  
•
•
MF8350Cdn: 20 sheets  
MF8050Cn: 1 sheet  
Coated Paper  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
MF8350Cdn: 50 sheets  
MF8050Cn: 50 sheets  
MF8350Cdn: 50 sheets  
MF8050Cn: 50 sheets  
MF8350Cdn: 50 sheets  
MF8050Cn: 15 sheets  
MF8350Cdn: 10 sheets  
MF8050Cn: 10 sheets  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
MF8350Cdn: 20 sheets  
MF8050Cn: 1 sheet  
MF8350Cdn: 20 sheets  
MF8050Cn: 1 sheet  
MF8350Cdn: 10 sheets  
MF8050Cn: 1 sheet  
MF8350Cdn: 5 sheets  
MF8050Cn: 1 sheet  
Transparency *3  
Label  
Index Card  
[Heavy 2]  
[Envelope]  
Envelope  
1
*
*
*
Only in MF8350Cdn, auto 2-sided print is available.  
2
3
Only in MF8350Cdn, auto 2-sided print in A4 or LETTER size is available.  
Use only the transparencies designed for laser printers.  
To prevent paper jams, do not use the following types of  
paper.  
CAUTION  
• Wrinkled or creased paper  
• Curled or rolled paper  
• Torn paper  
If you print on damp paper  
The following problems may occur.  
• Damp paper  
• Steam is emitted from the printer output area.  
• Very thin paper  
• Paper printed with a thermal transfer printer (Do not copy on the  
reverse side.)  
• Water droplets form on the back side of the operation panel and  
in the output area.  
The following types of paper do not print well:  
• Highly textured paper  
• Very smooth paper  
Because moisture in the paper is evaporating due to the heat  
generated when toner fixes, this is not a malfunction. (This is likely to  
occur when the room temperature is low.)  
If you smell a burnt odor, however, immediately turn OFF the machine,  
unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet, and then contact  
your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line. Continued  
use can result in a fire or electrical shock.  
• Glossy paper  
Make sure the paper is free from dust, lint, and oil stains.  
Make sure to test paper before purchasing large quantities.  
Store all paper wrapped and on a flat surface until ready  
for use. Keep opened packs in their original packaging in a  
cool, dry location.  
Store paper at 64.4 to 75.2°F (18 to 24°C), 40 % to 60 % RH.  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The shaded area indicates the approximate printable area of A4 paper. Note that the margin  
widths listed below are rough standards and there may be slight variations in actual use.  
Printable Range  
1/4 in.  
(5 mm)  
1/4 in.  
(5 mm)  
1/4 in.  
(5 mm)  
1/4 in.  
(5 mm)  
2-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Loading Paper  
ꢀ
MF8050Cn  
NOTE- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
If you use paper of a different size or type  
The default paper size/type is set to <Letter> and <Plain 2> in the  
setting menu. If you use a different paper size or paper type, you need  
to change the paper settings.  
(2)  
(1)  
"Setting a Paper Size and Type" (→P.2-16)  
(2)  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
In the Paper Cassette  
(1)  
Before loading paper in the paper cassette, see "Precautions  
When loading Legal size paper  
when Loading Paper" (→P.2-13).  
Holding the lock release lever at the front right, adjust the length  
of the paper cassette.  
NOTE- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
How to load paper in the optional paper cassette (Cassette 2)  
ꢀ
MF8350Cdn  
•
Load the paper in Cassette 2 in the same manner as you load the  
paper in Cassette 1.  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Pull out the paper cassette.  
Hold the paper cassette with both hands.  
1
ꢀ
MF8050Cn  
Spread the paper guides a little wider than the  
actual paper width.  
2
(1) Slide the side paper guides.  
Holding the lock release lever, slide the paper guides.  
The side paper guides move together.  
The lock release lever is not installed in MF8050Cn.  
(2) Slide the paper guide at the front center.  
Holding the lock release lever, slide the paper guides.  
*
If you want to change the size of the paper to be loaded, be sure  
to register the paper size in "Setting a Paper Size and Type" (→  
P.2-16).  
ꢀ
MF8350Cdn  
Load the custom size paper so that the edges of  
the paper stack are aligned with the rear side of  
the paper cassette.  
(1)  
3
(2)  
"Paper Loading Capacity" (→P.2-13)  
"Paper Loading Orientation" (→P.2-14)  
(1)  
(2)  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
When loading envelopes  
Align the paper guides with the loaded paper.  
4
(1) Close the envelope flap.  
(1)  
(1)  
(2) Place the stack of envelopes on a flat surface, flatten them  
to release any remaining air, and be sure that the edges are  
pressed tightly.  
(2)  
(2)  
Hold down the paper, then set it under the hooks  
(A) on the paper guides.  
5
Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the line of the  
load limit mark (B).  
(3) Loosen any stiff corners of the envelopes and flatten curls as  
shown in the figure.  
ꢀ
MF8350Cdn  
(A)  
(A)  
(B)  
(A)  
(B)  
(4) Align the edges of the envelopes on a flat surface.  
ꢀ
MF8050Cn  
(A)  
(B)  
(A)  
(A)  
(B)  
(5) Load the envelopes into the paper cassette with the print side  
up.  
Insert the paper cassette into the machine.  
Push it into the printer firmly.  
6
When loading Legal size paper  
When the paper cassette is inserted with it extended, the front  
side of the paper cassette is not flush with the front surface of the  
machine as shown in the figure.  
Set the legal dust cover on the paper cassette.  
2-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢀ
MF8350Cdn  
When loading long-size paper, open the tray  
extension.  
3
4
5
ꢀ
MF8050Cn  
Spread the paper guides a little wider than the  
actual paper width.  
Specify the loaded paper size and type.  
7
"Setting a Paper Size and Type" (→P.2-16)  
In the Multi-Purpose Tray (for MF8350Cdn)  
Before loading paper in the multi-purpose tray, see  
Gently insert the paper into the multi-purpose  
tray with the print side up.  
"Precautions when Loading Paper" (→P.2-13).  
Use the multi-purpose tray when you want to copy or print on  
a paper that is different from what is in the paper cassette.  
• Load the paper under the load limit guides (A).  
• Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit  
mark (B).  
Open the multi-purpose tray.  
1
"Paper Loading Capacity" (→P.2-13)  
Hold the handle at the center of the tray to open the multi-  
purpose tray.  
→
"Paper Loading Orientation" ( P.2-14)  
(A)  
(B)  
When loading envelopes  
IMPORTANT  
(1) Close the envelope flap.  
Be sure to insert the paper cassette.  
If the paper cassette is not inserted, you cannot print from the multi-  
purpose tray.  
Pull out the auxiliary tray.  
2
2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
(2) Place the stack of envelopes on a flat surface. Flatten the  
envelopes by releasing any remaining air and creasing the  
edges.  
In the Manual Feed Slot (for MF8050Cn)  
Before loading paper in the manual feed slot, see "Precautions  
when Loading Paper" (→P.2-13).  
Use the manual feed slot when you want to copy or print on a  
paper that is different from what is in the paper cassette.  
Slide the paper guides so they align with the  
width of the loaded paper as shown in the figure.  
1
Adjust the paper guides to the size of the paper, then load the  
paper deeply to back of the tray.  
(3) Loosen any stiff corners of the envelopes and flatten curls as  
shown in the figure.  
IMPORTANT  
(4) Align the edges of the envelopes on a flat surface.  
Be sure to insert the paper cassette.  
If the paper cassette is not inserted, you cannot print from the manual  
feed slot.  
Support the paper with your hands as shown in  
the figure, and insert the paper until it touches  
the back of the tray.  
2
When the paper touches the back of the tray, it is caught by the  
slot.  
Only one sheet of the paper can be loaded in the manual feed slot.  
"Paper Loading Orientation" (→P.2-14)  
(5) Gently insert the paper into the multi-purpose tray with the  
print side up.  
Align the paper guides with the width of the  
paper.  
6
7
When loading envelopes  
Close the envelope flap.  
Specify the loaded paper size and type.  
"Setting a Paper Size and Type" (→P.2-16)  
Specify the loaded paper size and type.  
3
"Setting a Paper Size and Type" (→P.2-16)  
2-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Precautions when Loading Paper  
CAUTION  
Paper Loading Capacity  
ꢀ
MF8350Cdn  
Be careful when handling paper  
Handle paper carefully not to cut your hands with the edges of the  
paper.  
Precautions when inserting the paper cassette  
Be careful not to catch your fingers.  
(A)  
(B)  
(C)  
IMPORTANT  
Be sure to align the paper guides with the width of the  
paper.  
If the paper guides are too loose or too tight, this may result in  
misfeeds or paper jams.  
Paper source  
(A)  
Multi-purpose  
tray  
(C)  
Cassette 2  
(optional)  
Paper type  
(B)  
Cassette 1  
When using paper that has been poorly cut  
If you use paper that has been poorly cut, multiple sheets of paper  
may be fed at once. In this case, fan the paper thoroughly, and then  
align the edges of the stack properly on a hard, flat surface.  
Plain paper (Ex. 21 lb Bond  
(80 g/m2)  
Approx. 50  
sheets  
Approx. 250  
sheets  
Approx. 250  
sheets  
Heavy paper (Ex. 25 lb  
Bond (91 g/m2)  
Approx. 30  
sheets  
Approx. 200  
sheets  
Approx. 200  
sheets  
Do not exceed the load limit mark when loading paper.  
Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the line of the load  
limit mark. If the paper stack exceeds the load limit mark lines, this  
may result in misfeeds.  
Heavy paper (Ex. 34 lb  
Bond (128 g/m2)  
Approx. 20  
sheets  
Approx. 150  
sheets  
Approx. 150  
sheets  
Transparency  
(Transparencies can only  
be printed in black and  
white.)  
Approx. 20  
sheets  
Approx. 50  
sheets  
Approx. 50  
sheets  
When printing on envelopes  
Load envelopes with the front side (non-glued side) facing up. You  
cannot print on the reverse side of envelopes.  
Approx. 20  
sheets  
Approx. 50  
sheets  
Approx. 50  
sheets  
Label  
Also, be sure to close the flap before loading envelopes.  
Approx. 20  
sheets  
Approx. 50  
sheets  
Approx. 50  
sheets  
If Index Card is curled  
Bend it in the opposite direction to flatten it before loading.  
Coated paper  
Envelope  
Approx. 5  
sheets  
Approx. 10  
sheets  
Approx. 10  
sheets  
NOTE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Detailed information about usable paper  
ꢀ
MF8050Cn  
"Paper Requirements" (→P.2-6)  
Size abbreviation on the paper guides of the paper  
cassette  
Paper size  
Paper guide  
Legal  
Letter  
LGL  
LTR  
Executive  
B5  
EXEC  
JIS B5  
(A)  
(B)  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Paper source  
(A)  
Paper type  
(B)  
Cassette 1  
Manual feed  
slot  
Approx. 150  
sheets  
Approx. 120  
sheets  
Approx. 100  
sheets  
Approx. 50  
sheets  
Approx. 50  
sheets  
Approx. 100  
sheets  
Approx. 10  
sheets  
Plain paper (Ex. 21 lb Bond (80 g/m2)  
Heavy paper (Ex. 25 lb Bond (91 g/m2)  
Heavy paper (Ex. 34 lb Bond (128 g/m2)  
Transparency (black-and-white printing only)  
Label  
1 sheet  
1 sheet  
1 sheet  
1 sheet  
1 sheet  
1 sheet  
1 sheet  
Coated paper  
Envelope  
2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
When printing paper with a letterhead or logo (previously printed paper)  
Paper Loading Orientation  
Load the paper in the proper orientation as follows.  
Be sure to load paper in portrait orientation.  
ꢀ Paper cassette  
Paper cassette  
Portrait layout  
Landscape layout  
1-sided printing  
(When "Selecting  
Print Side  
(MF8350Cdn  
Only)" (→P.2-19) is  
set to <Print Speed  
Priority> (the  
ꢀ Multi-purpose tray (MF8350Cdn Only)  
default setting))  
(with the printing side  
facing up)  
(with the printing side  
facing up)  
1-sided printing  
(When "Selecting  
Print Side  
ꢀ Manual feed slot (MF8050Cn Only)  
(MF8350Cdn  
Only)" (→P.2-19) is  
set to <Print Side  
Priority>)  
(with the printing side  
facing down)  
(with the printing side  
facing down)  
Automatic 2-sided  
printing  
(MF8350Cdn only)  
(with the front side facing  
down)  
(with the front side facing  
down)  
Multi-purpose tray (MF8350Cdn only)  
Portrait layout  
Landscape layout  
1-sided printing  
(When "Selecting  
Print Side  
(MF8350Cdn  
Only)" (→P.2-19) is  
set to <Print Speed  
Priority> (the  
(with the printing side  
facing up)  
(with the printing side  
facing up)  
default setting))  
1-sided printing  
(When "Selecting  
Print Side  
(MF8350Cdn  
Only)" (→P.2-19) is  
set to <Print Side  
Priority>)  
(with the printing side  
facing down)  
(with the printing side  
facing down)  
Automatic 2-sided  
printing  
(with the front side facing  
down)  
(with the front side facing  
down)  
2-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Envelope B5  
Manual feed slot (MF8050Cn only)  
Load the envelopes so that the flap is toward the back of the machine  
when it is viewed from the front.  
Portrait layout  
Landscape layout  
1-sided  
printing  
Close the flap and load  
the envelope.  
(with the printing side facing up) (with the printing side facing up)  
Printing on Envelopes  
Load envelopes with the front side (non-glued side) facing up  
as follows.  
Manual feed slot (MF8050Cn Only)  
(
: Feeding direction)  
Envelope COM10  
Load the envelopes so that the flap is toward the left of the machine  
Paper cassette  
when it is viewed from the front.  
Envelope Monarch*, No.10, DL, ISO-C5  
Load the envelopes so that the flap is toward the left of the paper cassette  
when they are viewed from the front.  
Close the flap and load  
the envelope.  
Close the flap and load  
the envelope.  
Envelope B5  
Load the envelopes so that the flap is toward the back of the machine  
*
You can load Envelope Monarch in the paper cassette only for  
MF8050Cn.  
when it is viewed from the front.  
Envelope B5  
Load the envelopes so that the flap is toward the back of the paper  
cassette when they are viewed from the front.  
Close the flap and load  
the envelope.  
Close the flap and load  
the envelope.  
The multi-purpose tray (MF8350Cdn Only  
Envelope COM10  
)
Load the envelopes so that the flap is toward the left of the machine  
when it is viewed from the front.  
Close the flap and load  
the envelope.  
2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Follow the procedure in this section to adjust the paper  
size and type settings for the cassette and the tray.  
Setting a Paper Size and Type  
IMPORTANT  
If the setting is different from the size of the loaded paper, an error  
message appears, or printing is not performed correctly.  
Select a paper type with [ ] or [ ], and then  
press [OK].  
5
Paper Type  
Plain 2 (19 lb Bond-  
Recycled  
Color  
For the Paper Cassette  
Heavy 1 (24 lb Bond...  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Select Paper/Settings  
Reset  
Press [  
] (Reset) to return to standby mode.  
6
Registering the Default Paper Settings for  
the Multi-purpose Tray (Manual Feed Slot)  
If you want to always load the same paper in the multi-purpose  
tray (manual feed slot), register the default paper using the  
following procedure.  
NOTE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
If the default paper is registered  
The setting screen is not displayed when paper is loaded.  
OK  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Press [  
] (Select Paper/Settings).  
1
2
Keys to be used for this operation  
Select <Paper Settings> with [ ] or [ ], and  
then press [OK].  
Select Paper/Settings  
Reset Numeric keys  
Select Paper  
MP Tray  
1
LTR:Plain 2  
LTR:Plain 2  
2
Paper Settings  
Select <Drawer 1> or <Drawer 2> with [ ] or [ ],  
and then press [OK].  
3
4
OK  
Paper Settings  
Multi-Purpose Tray  
Drawer 1  
Drawer 2  
Register Custom Paper  
Press [  
] (Select Paper/Settings).  
1
2
Select <Paper Settings> with [ ] or [ ], and  
then press [OK].  
Select Paper  
MP Tray  
Select a paper size with [ ] or [ ], and then  
press [OK].  
* When registering the custom paper, see "Registering a Custom  
Paper Size" (→P.2-17).  
1
LTR:Plain 2  
LTR:Plain 2  
2
Paper Settings  
* The registered custom paper is listed at the top. Select it with [ ].  
Paper Size  
LTR  
LGL  
Select <Multi-Purpose Tray> with [ ] or [ ],  
and then press [OK].  
3
STMT  
EXEC  
Paper Settings  
Multi-Purpose Tray  
Drawer 1  
Drawer 2  
Register Custom Paper  
2-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
If you select <Custom Size>  
Specifies the size of <X> direction and <Y> direction of the  
custom paper.  
Select <On> with [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK].  
4
5
6
7
8
Register Default Set.  
Off  
On  
Settings  
(1) Select the direction with [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK].  
Specify Size  
X
<Apply>  
X: 0 "  
Y: 0 "  
Y
Select <Paper Settings> with [ ] or [ ], and  
then press [OK].  
(2) Specify the size with [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK].  
You can also enter values using the numeric keys.  
Select Paper  
LTR:Plain 2  
Set Length for X  
3_1/8 "  
1
LTR:Plain 2  
LTR:Plain 2  
2
(3-8_1/2)  
Paper Settings  
(3) Select <Apply> with [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK].  
Select <Multi-Purpose Tray> with [ ] or [ ],  
and then press [OK].  
Specify Size  
X
<Apply>  
X: 3_1/8 "  
Y: 5_1/16 "  
Paper Settings  
Multi-Purpose Tray  
Drawer 1  
Drawer 2  
Register Custom Paper  
Y
Select the paper type with [ ] or [ ], and then  
press [OK].  
9
Select <Settings> with [ ] or [ ], and then  
press [OK].  
Paper Type  
Plain 2 (19 lb Bond-  
Recycled  
Register Default Set.  
Off  
On  
Settings  
Color  
Heavy 1 (24 lb Bond...  
Press [  
] (Reset) to return to standby mode.  
10  
Select a paper size with [ ] or [ ], and then  
press [OK].  
Registering a Custom Paper Size  
You can register sizes and types of frequently used paper.  
Registered paper is displayed when paper settings are specified  
for each paper source.  
* When registering the custom paper, see "Registering a Custom  
Paper Size" (→P.2-17).  
* The registered custom paper is listed at the top. Select it with [ ].  
• Paper cassette  
Paper size setting screen  
Paper Size  
LTR  
LGL  
STMT  
EXEC  
Paper Size  
1. 7 x 9 "  
LTR  
LGL  
STMT  
"For the Paper Cassette" (→P.2-16)  
• Multi-purpose tray (manual feed slot)  
- When <Register Default Set.> is set to <Off> (default)  
The screen to be displayed when paper is loaded in the  
multi-purpose tray (manual feed slot)  
Paper Size (MP Tray)  
1. 7 x 9 "  
LTR  
LGL  
STMT  
2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
- When <Register Default Set.> is set to <On>  
Paper size setting screen  
Specifies the size of <X> direction and <Y>  
direction.  
5
Paper Size  
1. 7 x 9 "  
LTR  
LGL  
STMT  
(1) Select the direction with [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK].  
Specify Size  
X
<Apply>  
X: 0 "  
Y: 0 "  
Y
"Registering the Default Paper Settings for the Multi-purpose Tray  
(Manual Feed Slot)" (→P.2-16)  
(2) Specify the size with [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK].  
You can also enter values using the numeric keys.  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Set Length for X  
3_1/8 "  
Select Paper/Settings  
Reset Numeric keys  
(3-8_1/2)  
(3) Select <Apply> with [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK].  
Specify Size  
X
<Apply>  
X: 3_1/8 "  
Y: 5_1/16 "  
Y
OK  
Select the paper type with [ ] or [ ], and then  
press [OK].  
6
7
Press [  
] (Select Paper/Settings).  
1
2
Select <Paper Settings> with [ ] or [ ], and  
then press [OK].  
Paper Type  
Plain 2 (19 lb Bond-  
Recycled  
Select Paper  
MP Tray  
Color  
1
Heavy 1 (24 lb Bond...  
LTR:Plain 2  
LTR:Plain 2  
2
Paper Settings  
Press [  
] (Reset) to return to standby mode.  
Select <Register Custom Paper> with [ ] or  
3
4
[
], and then press [OK].  
Paper Settings  
Multi-Purpose Tray  
Drawer 1  
Drawer 2  
Register Custom Paper  
Select <Not Registered> with [ ] or [ ], and  
then press [OK].  
When selecting the registered custom paper, you can edit and  
delete the custom paper.  
Register Custom Paper  
1. Not Registered  
2. Not Registered  
3. Not Registered  
2-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting Print Side (MF8350Cdn Only)  
You can specify whether to match the sides to be printed for  
2-sided printing and 1-sided printing.  
Depending on the setting for this item, the side to be printed  
changes. When using previously printed paper, read "Paper  
Loading Orientation" (→P.2-14) thoroughly to load the paper in  
the proper orientation.  
Press [  
] (Menu).  
1
2
Select <Common Settings> with [ ] or [ ], and  
then press [OK].  
Menu  
Sound Volume Control  
Common Settings  
Copy Settings  
When setting this item to <Print Speed  
Priority> (the default setting)  
Memory Media Settin  
...  
Because the sides to be printed for 2-sided printing and  
1-sided printing are different, the printing sides do not match.  
* When using previously printed paper, you need to switch the  
sides of loaded paper between 2-sided printing and 1-sided  
printing.  
Select <Paper Feed Method Switch> with [ ] or  
3
4
[
], and then press [OK].  
Common Settings  
Inch Entry  
Gram/Pound Swich  
Drawer Auto-Selecti...  
Paper Feed Method Sw  
Front Back  
1-sided  
1
2
4
3
4
printing  
2-sided  
printing  
1
2
3
Select the paper source to specify with [ ] or  
], and then press [OK].  
<Drawer 2> is displayed only when the optional paper cassette  
(Cassette 2) is installed in MF8350Cdn.  
Specify the setting in the following cases.  
[
• When not using previously printed paper  
• When performing only 1-sided printing on previously  
printed paper  
Paper Feed Method  
Multi-Purpose Tray  
Drawer 1  
When setting this item to <Print Side  
Priority>  
Drawer 2  
The sides to be printed for 2-sided printing and 1-sided  
printing match.  
* Even when using previously printed paper, you do not need  
to switch the sides of loaded paper between 2-sided printing  
and 1-sided printing.  
Select <Print Speed Priority> or <Print Side  
Priority> with [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK].  
5
Front Back  
1-sided  
Multi-Purpose Tray  
Print Speed Priority  
Print Side Priority  
1
2
3
3
4
printing  
2-sided  
printing  
1
2
4
Specify the setting in the following case.  
• When performing 2-sided printing and 1-sided printing on  
previously printed paper  
When specifying <Print Speed Priority>, load paper as  
follows.  
(
: Feeding direction)  
* For details on the procedure for loading paper when  
using multi-purpose tray or when printing pages of the  
landscape layout, see "Paper Loading Orientation" (→  
P.2-14).  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Menu  
When performing 1-sided  
printing  
When performing 2-sided  
printing  
<Print Speed  
Priority>  
Load paper with the printing  
side facing up.  
Load paper with the front side  
(first page) facing down.  
OK  
2-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
When specifying <Print Side Priority>, load paper as  
follows.  
(
: Feeding direction)  
* For details on the procedure for loading paper when  
using multi-purpose tray or when printing pages of the  
landscape layout, see "Paper Loading Orientation" (→  
P.2-14).  
The procedure for loading paper is the same for 2-sided  
printing and 1-sided printing.  
<Print Side  
Priority>  
•
When performing 1-sided printing, load paper with the  
printing side facing down.  
•
When performing 2-sided printing, load paper with the  
front side (first page) facing down.  
Press [  
] (Menu) to close the menu screen.  
6
2-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
3
Copying  
This category describes the copying features.  
3-2  
3-2  
Basic Copying Method  
Canceling Copy Jobs  
Copy Settings  
3-3  
Selecting Copy Papers  
3-3  
3-3  
3-4  
3-4  
3-5  
3-5  
3-6  
3-6  
3-6  
Adjusting the Density  
Selecting Image Quality (Copy)  
2-Sided Copying (MF8350Cdn Only)  
Enlarging/Reducing Copies  
Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (N on 1)  
Collating Copies  
Erase Dark Borders and Frame Lines (Frame Erase)  
Emphasize the Outline of an Image (Sharpness)  
Copying the ID Card  
3-7  
3-8  
Changing the Default Values  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
This section describes the basic procedure for copying.  
Basic Copying Method  
Place documents on the platen glass or load  
them in the feeder.  
"Placing Documents" (→P.2-4)  
"Documents Requirements" (→P.2-2)  
1
2
*
Up to 50 documents can be loaded in the feeder. The 51st and  
subsequent documents are not scanned.  
Press [  
].  
Use numeric keys to enter the desired copy  
quantity (1 to 99).  
4
Copy: Press Start  
1
1
100%  
Density:  
LTR  
0
+
-
Original Type: Text/Ph...  
2-Sided: Off  
Specify the copy settings as needed.  
You can specify up to 9 items.  
(for details, see P.3-3 to P.3-6.)  
Press [  
] (Color) or [  
] (B & W).  
-
-
For color copy  
3
5
Press [ ] (Color).  
For black and white copy,  
press [ ] (B & W).  
Paper select  
Density  
Reduced layout  
Collating  
Image quality  
2-Sided  
Enlarged/reduced  
Frame erase  
Sharpness  
Canceling Copy Jobs  
You can cancel scanning or ongoing jobs in the following  
procedure.  
The settings that are specified here apply only to copy  
operation which you are currently performing. To apply the  
valid settings for all copy operations, see "Changing the  
Default Values" (→P.3-8).  
Press [  
] (Stop).  
1
When multiple jobs are being processed, select  
the jobs to be canceled with [ ] or [ ], and  
then press [OK].  
2
When the <Cancel?> message appears, select  
<Yes> with [ ], and then press [OK].  
Copy jobs are canceled.  
3
3-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Copy Settings  
Selecting Copy Papers  
Copy mode screen  
Setting screen*  
Copy: Press Start  
Select Paper  
1
1
100%  
Density: 0  
LTR  
LGL:Plain 2  
* You can display the setting  
screen also by selecting  
<Paper> in the copy mode  
screen.  
+
1
2
LTR:Plain 2  
LTR:Plain 2  
-
Original Type: Text...  
2-Sided: Off  
Select the paper cassette with [ ] or [ ] → [OK]  
Density adjustment  
Adjusting the Density  
Copy mode screen  
ꢀ
Setting screen*  
Density  
-
Background: Default  
Color Balance: Defau...  
Copy: Press Start  
Makes the copy  
density lighter.  
[
[
]
]
+
1
1
100%  
Density: 0  
LTR  
+
Makes the copy  
density darker.  
-
Original Type: Text...  
2-Sided: Off  
Adjust the density with [ ] or [ ] → [OK]  
*
You can display the setting screen also by selecting  
Background Adjustment  
Setting screen*  
Density  
Adjusting the color  
ꢀ
ꢀ
<Density> in the copy mode screen.  
Setting screen*  
Density  
-
Background: Default  
Adjust the density with  
+
[
] or [ ] → [OK]  
-
+
Background: Default  
Color Balance: Defau...  
Color Balance: Defaul  
Fine Adjustment  
-
+
Adjust by Color  
Select <Color Balance> with [ ] or [  
]
Select <Background> with  
] or [  
[
]
Makes the background  
density lighter.  
Select a color for which you want to  
[
[
]
]
adjust the color balance with  
[
] or [  
]
Makes the background  
density darker.  
Color Balance  
<Apply>  
Select <Fine Adjustment> with  
] or [  
[
]
+
Yellow:  
0
-
+
Magenta:  
0
If adjusting the density for each color  
-
Background  
Off  
Fine Adjustment  
+
Cyan:  
0
-
(1) Select [Adjust by Color] with  
[
] or [  
] → [OK]  
Fine Adjustment  
-
Adjust by Color  
Adjust the color balance with [ ] or  
+
[
]
Does not adjust the  
background density.  
<Off>  
Yellow  
Adjusts the background  
density.  
<Fine  
0
(2) Select the color you want to adjust the  
Adjustment>  
The next step  
density with [ ] or [ ] → [OK]  
(-8 - +8)  
(3) Adjust the density with [ ] or [  
] →  
[OK]  
[
[
]
]
Makes the color lighter.  
Makes the color darker.  
• [ ] Makes the background color  
density lighter.  
• [ ] To make the background color  
density darker.  
(4) Select [Apply] with [ ] or [ ] → [OK]  
Select [Apply] with [ ] or [ ] → [OK]  
To next page  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Copy Settings  
Selecting Image Quality (Copy)  
Copy mode screen  
Setting screen*  
Copy: Press Start  
Original Type  
Text/Photo/Map  
Text/Photo/Map: (Qua...  
Printed Image  
Text  
1
1
100%  
Density: 0  
LTR  
* You can display the setting  
screen also by selecting  
<Original Type> in the copy  
mode screen.  
+
-
Original Type: Text...  
2-Sided: Off  
Select the appropriate settings for the document with  
] or [ ], and then press [OK]  
[
This option is suitable for documents that contain text and photos or  
fine diagrams and text such as maps.  
This option scans the document at a low resolution for color copy.  
<Text/Photo/  
Map (Speed)>  
When selecting <Text/Photo/Map (Quality)>  
<Text/Photo/  
Map>  
This option is suitable for documents that contain text and photos or  
fine diagrams and text such as maps.  
Adjust the priority with [ ] or [ ] → [OK]  
This option is suitable for documents that contain text and photos or  
fine diagrams and text such as maps.  
Map (Quality)> This option scans the document at a high resolution.  
You can set the image quality priority to text or photos.  
High Image Quality  
Text Priority  
<Text/Photo/  
Photo Priority  
<Printed  
Image>  
This option is suitable for documents that contain photos printed in a  
magazine.  
This option is suitable for documents that contain text without photos  
or illustrations.  
<Text>  
2-Sided Copying (MF8350Cdn Only)  
Copy mode screen  
Setting screen*  
Copy: Press Start  
2-Sided  
Off  
1 2-Sided  
1
1
100%  
Density: 0  
LTR  
+
* You can display the setting  
screen also by selecting  
<2-Sided> in the copy mode  
screen.  
-
Original Type: Text...  
2-Sided: Off  
Format Settings  
Select <1→2-Sided> with [ ] or [ ] → [OK]  
If you want to specify 2-Sided copying format  
(1) Select <Format Settings> with [ ] or [ ] → [OK]  
(2) Select the orientation of the document with [ ] or [ ] → [OK]  
(3) Select the finishing format with [ ] or [ ] → [OK]  
Finishing Format  
Book Type  
Calendar Typ...  
Original Orientation  
Portrait  
Landscape  
3-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Copy Settings  
* You can display the setting screen also by  
selecting <Scale> in the copy mode screen.  
Enlarging/Reducing Copies  
Copy mode screen  
Setting screen*  
For the preset zoom, you can select from the  
following setting values.  
Copy: Press Start  
Copy Ratio  
Custom Ratio  
100% Direct  
400% Max  
200%  
• 100% Direct  
• 400% Max  
• 200%  
• 129% STMT → LTR  
• 78% LGL → LTR  
• 64% LTR → STMT  
• 50%  
• 25% Min  
1
1
100%  
Density: 0  
LTR  
+
-
Original Type: Text...  
2-Sided: Off  
Select the copy ratio with [ ] or [ ] → [OK]  
Load paper of the size to be output. (→P.2-9)  
Register the paper size to be output. (→P.2-16)  
For custom ratio  
(1) Select <Custom Ratio> with [ ] or [ ] → [OK]  
(2) Specify the ratio with [ ] or [ ] → [OK]  
You can also enter the copy ratio using the numeric keys.  
Copy Ratio  
Custom Ratio  
100% Direct  
400% Max  
200%  
Custom Ratio  
100  
%
(25-400)  
Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (N on 1)  
* You can display the setting screen also  
by selecting <N on 1> in the copy mode  
screen.  
Copy mode screen  
Setting screen*  
Reduce two-page  
documents to fit on one  
sheet of paper.  
N on 1  
Off  
2 on 1  
4 on 1  
ID Card Copy  
Copy: Press Start  
<2 on 1>  
<4 on 1>  
1
1
100%  
Density: 0  
LTR  
+
-
Reduce four-page  
documents to fit on one  
sheet of paper.  
Original Type: Text...  
2-Sided: Off  
Select <2 on 1> or <4 on 1> with [ ] or [  
]
About margins among documents  
When you copy in an N on 1 layout, margins  
are created among the reduced documents.  
Scan Size  
LTR  
LGL  
When specifying the layout  
(1) Select <Select Layout> with [ ] or [  
]
STMT  
→ [OK]  
(2) Select the layout with [ ] or [ ] → [OK]  
Select the size of the original document with [ ] or [  
]
Select Layout  
2 on 1 (1)  
2 on 1 (2)  
4 on 1 (1)  
4 on 1 (2)  
Output Size  
LGL: Plain 2  
1
LTR: Plain 2  
LTR: Plain 2  
2
Select the output paper size with [ ] or [ ] → [OK]  
To next page  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Copy Settings  
Collating Copies  
Copy mode screen  
Setting screen*  
* You can display the setting screen also  
by selecting <Collate> in the copy mode  
screen.  
Copy: Press Start  
Collate  
Off  
On  
1
1
100%  
LTR  
+
Density: 0  
-
Original Type: Text...  
2-Sided: Off  
Select <On> with [ ] or [ ] → [OK]  
Printouts of a complete job are grouped.  
For example, if you are copying three copies of a three-page  
document, printouts of a complete job are grouped and arranged in  
this page order: "1, 1, 1", "2, 2, 2", "3, 3, 3".  
<Off>  
<On>  
Printouts of a complete job are collated.  
For example, if you are printing three copies of a three-page  
document, printouts of a complete job are grouped and arranged in  
this page order: "1, 2, 3", "1, 2, 3", "1, 2, 3".  
Erase Dark Borders and Frame Lines (Frame Erase)  
Copy mode screen  
Setting screen*  
* For MF8050Cn, you can display the setting  
screen also by pressing [ ] (Frame  
Copy: Press Start  
Erase Frame  
Off  
On  
Erase) on the operation panel.  
1
1
100%  
LTR  
N on 1: Off  
Collate: Off  
Erase Frame: Off  
Select <Erase Frame> with [ ] or [  
]
Select <On> with [ ] or [  
]
Scan Size  
LTR  
LGL  
Specify Frame Width  
0_1/8 "  
STMT  
(1/16-1_15/16)  
Specify the frame width to be erased  
Select the size of the original  
document with [ ] or [ ] → [OK]  
with [ ] or [  
]
You can also specify values using the numeric keys.  
Emphasize the Outline of an Image (Sharpness)  
Lowers the sharpness and decreases  
the contrast on an image's outline.  
It is appropriate for documents which  
contain printed image or halftone.  
Copy mode screen  
Setting screen*  
[
]
Copy: Press Start  
Sharpness  
-
1
1
100%  
LTR  
Raise the sharpness and emphasize  
the outline of an Image.  
It is appropriate for documents which  
are blueprints or thinly penciled.  
Collate: Off  
+
Erase Frame: Off  
[
]
+
Sharpness: 0  
-
Select <Sharpness> with  
Adjust the sharpness with  
[ ] or [ ] → [OK]  
[
] or [  
]
3-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Copying the ID Card  
You can make a copy of a 2-sided card onto one side of a paper.  
Turn and place the card.  
Place the card with a 1/4" (5 mm) space created from the left edge  
of the platen glass.  
6
Keys to be used for this operation  
N on 1  
COPY  
Additionally, align the center of the card with the arrow mark.  
If you want to arrange the cards horizontally  
If you want to arrange the cards vertically  
Start  
OK  
Place a card on the platen glass, and then close  
the feeder.  
Place the card with a 1/4" (5 mm) space created from the left edge  
of the platen glass.  
1
Press [  
] (Color) or [  
] (B & W).  
7
NOTE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Place a document (card)  
Additionally, align the center of the card with the arrow mark.  
Place a card on the platen glass.  
If you want to arrange the cards horizontally  
Copy ratio  
The copy ratio will automatically be set to <100%>.  
Usable paper size  
A size larger than A4 or Letter  
Unavailable functions in combination  
You cannot use an ID card copy together with the following functions.  
If you want to arrange the cards vertically  
•
•
•
•
•
2 on 1/4 on 1  
Collating  
2-Sided  
Copy ratio  
Frame erase  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Press [  
Press [  
].  
2
3
] (N on 1).  
You can display the setting screen also by selecting <N on 1> in  
the copy mode screen.  
Copy: Press Start  
1
1
100%  
Density: 0  
LTR  
+
-
Original Type: Text...  
2-Sided: Off  
Select <ID Card Copy> with [ ] or [ ], and then  
press [OK].  
4
5
N on 1  
Off  
2 on 1  
4 on 1  
ID Card Copy  
Press [  
] (Color) or [  
] (B & W).  
After scanning the document completely, proceed to the next  
step.  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Changing the Default Values  
The default values of the copy are the function which is applied  
Select a setting item with [ ] or [ ], and then  
press [OK].  
4
when [  
] (Reset) is pressed or the power is turned ON. You  
can change the default values to suit your needs.  
You can register the following types of settings as the default  
values.  
• Quantity  
• Density  
• Original type  
• 2-Sided  
Change Defaults  
<Apply>  
No. of Copies: 1  
+
Density:  
0
-
Original Type: Text...  
• Copy ratio  
• Paper  
• N on 1  
• Collating  
• Frame erase  
• Sharpness  
For details on the settings, see the following items.  
"Selecting Copy Papers" (→P.3-3)  
"Adjusting the Density" (→P.3-3)  
"Selecting Image Quality (Copy)" (→P.3-4)  
"2-Sided Copying (MF8350Cdn Only)" (→P.3-4)  
"Enlarging/Reducing Copies" (→P.3-5)  
"Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (N on 1)" (→P.3-5)  
"Collating Copies" (→P.3-6)  
"Erase Dark Borders and Frame Lines (Frame Erase)" (→P.3-6)  
"Emphasize the Outline of an Image (Sharpness)" (→P.3-6)  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Menu  
After specifying the settings, select <Apply> with  
5
6
[
] or [ ], and then press [OK].  
Change Defaults  
<Apply>  
No. of Copies: 1  
+
Density:  
0
-
Original Type: Text...  
OK  
Press [  
] (Menu) to close the menu screen.  
Press [  
] (Menu).  
1
2
Select <Copy Settings> with [ ] or [ ], and then  
press [OK].  
Menu  
Sound Volume Control  
Common Settings  
Copy Settings  
Memory Media Settin  
...  
Make sure that <Change Defaults> is selected,  
and then press [OK].  
3
Copy Settings  
Change Defaults  
3-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter  
4
Printing from a Computer  
This category describes how to print from computers.  
* If you are a Macintosh user, see the Printer Driver Guide.  
Installing the Printer Driver  
4-2  
4-3  
Printing from a Computer  
Scaling Print Output  
4-3  
4-3  
4-4  
4-4  
4-5  
4-5  
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet  
2-sided Printing (MF8350Cdn Only)  
Checking/Deleting Print Jobs  
Checking Print Status in the Middle of Printing or Waiting  
Deleting Print Job in the Middle of Printing or Waiting  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The following procedures are required as the preparations  
for printing.  
Installing the Printer Driver  
Step 1  
Select USB or network connection.  
Starter Guide → 4 Connecting to a Computer and  
Installing the Drivers  
Install the printer driver.  
Step 2  
You may also need to install Canon Driver Information  
Assist Service depending on your environment.  
NOTE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
When changing the port number of the machine  
Change the port number of the machine.  
e-Manual → Security → Restricting Network Connection → Setting Port Number  
Change the computer settings.  
e-Manual → Network Settings → Setting Up a Computer for Printing/Sending a Fax → Computer Settings  
About the printer driver  
The printer driver is software required for printing from an application. The printer driver will convert application software's print data to print data for  
the printer.  
About the UFRII LT printer driver  
The UFRII LT printer driver has the following features.  
•
•
•
The UFRII LT printer driver enables you to output print data at an optimum speed by dividing the workload using a computer and the printer.  
As well as providing faster and more stable printing than conventional models, the UFRII LT printer driver uses less memory to operate.  
In addition to the conversion of print data, the UFRII LT printer driver is equipped with the functions capable of spooling print data and configuring  
the print condition, and various types of print finishing can be set such as scaling or gutter adjustment.  
•
The UFRII LT printer driver is included in the supplied User Software CD-ROM  
When performing this procedure in shared printer environment  
Along with the driver, install [Canon Driver Information Assist Service] on the computer of the print server. By this installation, the characteristic  
information about the image quality can be transmitted to the client computers correctly, and the department management becomes available as  
well.  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Printing from a Computer  
Scaling Print Output  
If you want to increase or decrease the  
magnification manually, select [Manual Scaling] →  
specify the scaling ratio for [Scaling].  
4
You can enlarge or reduce documents to match the output  
paper size, such as reducing a document created in A4 size to  
print on B5, or enlarging a document created in B5 size to print  
on A4.  
There are two methods for scaling a document: select the  
output size of the document to scale it automatically, or specify  
the scaling value manually.  
NOTE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
•
If you are using an application that enables you to enlarge or  
reduce the document, configure the settings in the application.  
The display may differ according to the operating system, as well as  
the type and version of the printer driver.  
•
NOTE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
If the ratio is less than 25% or more than 200%, the document is  
printed without scaling on the paper specified in [Output Size].  
Display the [Page Setup] sheet.  
1
For details on the procedure for displaying the printer driver, see  
"Printing with the Printer Driver" in the e-Manual.  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Click [OK].  
5
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet  
This mode enables you to reduce multiple pages to fit onto  
one sheet of paper. You can fit 2, 4, 6, 8, 9 or 16 pages on one  
sheet. Fitting multiple pages onto one sheet enables you to  
create well organized documents. You can cut down print costs  
by saving papers, and it is also useful for saving space.  
NOTE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
•
•
You cannot enlarge and reduce manually when using this function.  
The display may differ according to the operating system, as well as  
the type and version of the printer driver.  
Select a page size from [Page Size].  
2
•
Although there may be a function for printing multiple copies  
depending on the application you are using, do not use it together  
with this function. If you do, printing may not be executed correctly.  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Display the [Page Setup] sheet.  
For details on the procedure for displaying the printer driver, see  
"Printing with the Printer Driver Displayed" in the e-Manual.  
1
Select output size of the document from [Output  
Size].  
3
The document is scaled automatically according to the settings  
made in [Page Size] and [Output Size].  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Select the page layout from [Page Layout].  
Select [2-sided Printing] from [Print Style].  
2
2
3
NOTE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Select binding edge for the paper printout from  
[Binding Location].  
If the options are not displayed for [Page Layout], display the [Device  
Settings] Sheet, then select [Auto] or [Enabled] from [Spooling at  
Host].  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Select the page order from [Page Order].  
3
The output image is displayed in the preview area.  
Click [OK].  
4
Checking/Deleting Print Jobs  
The output image is displayed in the preview area.  
You can check or delete jobs in the middle of currently printing  
or waiting.  
Click [OK].  
4
NOTE- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Document name and user name displayed in the operation  
2-sided Printing (MF8350Cdn Only)  
panel  
This mode enables you to make two-sided printing. You can  
cut down print costs by half when copying in large quantities.  
Some file name may be displayed incorrectly depending on the type  
of the file to be printed.  
NOTE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Keys to be used for this operation  
•
The page sizes for which two-sided printing is available differ  
according to printer model. For details, view the online help.  
The display may differ according to the operating system, as well as  
the type and version of the printer driver.  
•
Status Monitor/Cancel  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Display the [Finishing] sheet.  
For details on the procedure for displaying the printer driver, see  
"Printing with the Printer Driver" in the e-Manual.  
1
OK  
4-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Checking Print Status in the Middle of Printing or Waiting  
Press [  
] (Status Monitor/Cancel).  
1
2
NOTE- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
If the Processing/Data Indicator on the operation panel is:  
Select <Print Job Status/History> with [ ] or [ ],  
and then press [OK].  
•
Turned on/blinking  
A job is being processed.  
Turned off  
Status Monitor/Cancel  
Device Status  
Copy Job Status  
•
Not jobs are in the memory  
Fax Job Status/Hist...  
Print Job Status/His  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Press [  
] (Status Monitor/Cancel).  
1
2
Select <Print Job Status> with [ ] or [ ], and  
then press [OK].  
3
4
5
Select <Print Job Status/History> with [ ] or [ ],  
and then press [OK].  
Print Status/History  
Print Job Status  
Print Job History  
Status Monitor/Cancel  
Device Status  
Copy Job Status  
Fax Job Status/Hist...  
Print Job Status/His  
Select the jobs to be deleted with [ ] or [ ], and  
then press [OK].  
Select <Print Job Status> with [ ] or [ ], and  
then press [OK].  
3
4
5
Print Job Status  
09:42AM Printing  
Print Status/History  
Print Job Status  
Print Job History  
09:43AM Waiting:Pr  
...  
Select <Cancel> with [ ] or [ ], and then press  
[OK].  
Select the jobs to be checked with [ ] or [ ], and  
then press [OK].  
Details  
<Cancel>  
Job Number: 0020  
Status: Printing  
Time: 01/01 09:42AM  
Print Job Status  
09:42AM Printing  
09:43AM Waiting:Pr  
...  
Select <Yes> with [ ], and then press [OK].  
6
7
Select the options you want to check with [ ] or  
[
], and then press [OK].  
Cancel?  
Details  
<Cancel>  
Job Number: 0020  
Status: Printing  
Time: 01/01 09:42AM  
Yes  
No  
Confirm the settings.  
6
7
Press [  
] (Status Monitor/Cancel) to close the  
Status Monitor/Cancel screen.  
Press [  
] (Status Monitor/Cancel) to close the  
NOTE- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Status Monitor/Cancel screen.  
Pressing [  
] (Stop) can also delete the print jobs  
You can delete the print jobs also by pressing [  
] (Stop).  
Deleting Print Job in the Middle of Printing or Waiting  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
NOTE- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
If the Processing/Data Indicator on the operation panel is:  
•
Turned on/blinking  
A job is being processed.  
Turned off  
•
Not jobs are in the memory  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
5
Registering Destinations in the Address Book  
This section describes the procedures for registering destinations in the address book and changing  
or deleting the registered settings.  
Address Book  
5-2  
One-touch Keys  
Coded Dialing  
Group Dialing  
5-2  
5-2  
5-2  
Storing/Editing One-Touch Keys  
5-3  
Storing/Editing from the Operation Panel  
Storing/Editing from the Remote UI  
5-3  
5-4  
Storing/Editing Coded Dial Codes  
5-6  
Storing/Editing from the Operation Panel  
Storing/Editing from the Remote UI  
5-6  
5-8  
Storing/Editing Recipients for Group Dialing  
5-9  
Storing/Editing from the Operation Panel  
Storing/Editing from the Remote UI  
5-9  
5-12  
5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
You can specify document destinations by entering the characters using the numeric  
keys or selecting from the address book.  
Address Book  
You can register frequently used destinations under one-touch  
keys and coded dial codes.  
You can also save one-touch keys and coded dial codes as a  
group.  
To register destinations, use the operation panel or the Remote  
UI.  
One-touch Keys  
Register a recipient for a one-touch key, and then press the  
one-touch key to specify the recipient. Up to 19 recipients can  
be registered.  
"Storing/Editing One-Touch Keys" (→P.5-3)  
Coded Dialing  
Register a recipient for a coded dial code. Press [  
] (Coded  
Dial), and then specify a recipient by entering the coded dial  
code. Up to 181 recipients can be registered.  
"Storing/Editing Coded Dial Codes" (→P.5-6)  
Group Dialing  
You can group the registered recipients (up to 199 recipients)  
under one-touch keys and coded dial codes. Group addresses  
are to be registered for an unused one-touch key or coded dial  
code. Simply specifying the one-touch key or coded dial code  
allow you to specify multiple addresses registered as a group.  
"Storing/Editing Recipients for Group Dialing" (→P.5-9)  
NOTE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Saving/Reading the address book  
The address book can be saved as a file in your computer using the  
Remote UI, and the saved file can be read in the machine.  
e-Manual → Setting and Managing from Computer → Managing  
the Address Book  
However, you cannot edit the address book saved as a file.  
Viewing destinations registered in the address book  
You can view destinations by printing destination lists.  
e-Manual → Basic Operation → Printing a List → Printing an  
Address Book List  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Storing/Editing One-Touch Keys  
(5) Confirm that <Name> is selected, and then press [OK].  
This section describes the following procedure.  
• Storing one-touch keys  
Fax  
• Editing one-touch keys  
• Deleting one-touch keys  
<Apply>  
Name:  
Destination:  
One-Touch: 01  
Storing/Editing from the Operation Panel  
Keys to be used for this operation  
(6) Use the numeric keys to specify <Name>.  
"Text Input Method" (→P.1-10)  
Address Book  
FAX Tone, Numeric keys  
Name (Max 16 char.)  
CANON  
<Apply>  
Entry Mode: A  
(7) Select <Apply> with [  
], and then press [OK].  
Name (Max 16 char.)  
CANON  
<Apply>  
Back  
OK  
Entry Mode: A  
Press [  
].  
1
(8) Select <Destination> with [  
], and then press [OK].  
Press [  
] (Address Book).  
2
Fax  
<Apply>  
Name: CANON  
Destination:  
One-Touch: 01  
ꢀ When storing a new one-touch key  
(1) Confirm that <Register New to Address Book> is selected, and then  
press [OK].  
(9) Use the numeric keys to specify <Destination>.  
Press [OK] to specify <Settings> as needed.  
Register New to Addr  
Edit Address Book  
Address Book Details  
Destination (Max 40)  
0123456789  
<Apply>  
All  
A-Z  
Settings  
(2) Select <One-Touch> with [  
], and then press [OK].  
Register Dest.  
Coded Dial  
One-Touch  
(10) Select <Apply> with [  
], and then press [OK].  
Destination (Max 40)  
0123456789  
<Apply>  
Settings  
(3) Confirm that <Fax> is selected, and then press [OK].  
Destination Type  
Fax  
(11) Select <Apply> with [  
], and then press [OK].  
Group  
Fax  
<Apply>  
Name: CANON  
Destination: 0123456...  
One-Touch: 01  
(4) Select the number to be registered with [  
press [OK].  
] or [  
], and then  
Enter Registration No.  
01 Not Registered  
02 Not Registered  
03 Not Registered  
04 Not Registered  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
ꢀ When editing a registered one-touch key  
(3) Select a destination that you want to delete with [  
and then press [OK].  
] or [  
],  
(1) Press [  
].  
CANON 0123456789  
CANON 0123456789  
All  
A-Z 0-9  
All A-Z  
(4) Select <Yes> with [  
], and then press [OK].  
(2) Select <Edit Address Book> with [  
], and then press [OK].  
Delete from  
address book?  
Register New to Add...  
Edit Address Book  
Address Book Details  
Yes  
No  
All  
A-Z  
(3) Select a destination that you want to edit with [  
then press [OK].  
] or [  
], and  
Press [  
] (Back) to close the menu screen.  
3
CANON 0123456789  
Storing/Editing from the Remote UI  
Start the web browser.  
1
2
All  
A-Z 0-9  
Enter "http://<the IP address of the machine>/" in  
the address field, and then press the [ENTER] key  
on your keyboard.  
(4) Select an item that you want to edit with [  
] or [  
], and then  
press [OK].  
• Name  
• Destination  
• One-Touch  
Input Example: "http://192.168.0.215/"  
Fax  
<Apply>  
Name: CANON02  
Destination: 9876543...  
One-Touch: 02  
Log on to the Remote UI.  
3
(5) Select <Apply> with [  
(6) Select <Apply> with [  
] after editing, and then press [OK].  
], and then press [OK].  
(1) Select [System Manager Mode].  
(2) Enter [System Manager ID] and [System Manager PIN].  
(3) Click [OK].  
Fax  
<Apply>  
Name: CANON02  
Destination: 9876543...  
One-Touch: 02  
ꢀ When deleting a registered one-touch key  
(1) Press [  
].  
CANON 0123456789  
(1)  
All A-Z  
(2)  
(2) Select <Delete from Address Book> with [  
], and then press [OK].  
(3)  
Edit Address Book  
Address Book Details  
Delete from Address  
All  
A-Z  
5-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Click [Address] → [One-Touch].  
Specify the required settings, and then click [OK].  
4
7
(2)  
(1)  
(2)  
(1)  
ꢀ When storing a new one-touch key  
Proceed to Step 5.  
ꢀ When editing a registered one-touch key  
(1) Click the number or name.  
(2) Click [Edit].  
(3) Specify the required settings in the edit screen for destinations, and  
then click [OK].  
ꢀ When deleting a registered one-touch key  
(1) Select the check box for which you want to delete the number, and  
then click [Delete].  
Click [Not Registered] or the number which is not  
registered.  
5
Select [Fax] from [Type].  
6
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Storing/Editing Coded Dial Codes  
(5) Use the numeric keys to specify <Name>.  
This section describes the following procedure.  
• Storing coded dial codes  
"Text Input Method" (→P.1-10)  
• Editing coded dial codes  
• Deleting coded dial codes  
Name (Max 16 char.)  
CANON  
<Apply>  
Entry Mode: A  
Storing/Editing from the Operation Panel  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Address Book  
FAX Tone, Numeric keys  
(6) Select <Apply> with [  
], and then press [OK].  
Name (Max 16 char.)  
CANON  
<Apply>  
Entry Mode: A  
(7) Select <Destination> with [  
], and then press [OK].  
Fax  
<Apply>  
Back  
OK  
Name: CANON  
Destination:  
Coded Dial: 001  
Press [  
].  
1
(8) Use the numeric keys to specify <Destination>.  
Press [OK] to specify <Settings> as needed.  
Press [  
](Address Book).  
2
Destination (Max 40)  
0123456789  
<Apply>  
ꢀ When storing a new coded dial code  
(1) Confirm that <Register New to Address Book> is selected, and then  
press [OK].  
Settings  
Register New to Addr  
Edit Address Book  
(9) Select <Apply> with [  
], and then press [OK].  
Address Book Details  
Destination (Max 40)  
0123456789  
<Apply>  
All  
A-Z  
(2) Confirm that <Coded Dial> is selected, and then press [OK].  
Settings  
Register Dest.  
Coded Dial  
One-Touch  
(10) Select <Coded Dial> with [  
], and then press [OK].  
Fax  
<Apply>  
Name: CANON  
(3) Confirm that <Fax> is selected, and then press [OK].  
Destination: 0123456...  
Coded Dial: 001  
Destination Type  
Fax  
Group  
(11) Select the number to be registered with [  
press [OK].  
] or [  
], and then  
Enter Registration No.  
001 Not Registered  
002 Not Registered  
003 Not Registered  
004 Not Registered  
(4) Confirm that <Name> is selected, and then press [OK].  
Fax  
<Apply>  
Name:  
Destination:  
Coded Dial: 001  
5-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
(12) Select <Apply> with [  
], and then press [OK].  
(2) Select <Delete from Address Book> with [  
], and then press [OK].  
Fax  
<Apply>  
Name: CANON  
Destination: 0123456...  
Coded Dial: 001  
Edit Address Book  
Address Book Details  
Delete from Address  
All  
A-Z  
(3) Select a destination that you want to delete with [  
and then press [OK].  
] or [  
],  
ꢀ When editing a registered coded dial code  
(1) Press [  
].  
CANON 0123456789  
CANON 0123456789  
All  
A-Z 0-9  
All A-Z  
(4) Select <Yes> with [  
], and then press [OK].  
(2) Select <Edit Address Book> with [  
], and then press [OK].  
Delete from  
address book?  
Register New to Add...  
Edit Address Book  
Address Book Details  
Yes  
No  
All  
A-Z  
(3) Select a destination that you want to edit with [  
then press [OK].  
] or [  
], and  
Press [  
] (Back) to close the menu screen.  
3
CANON 0123456789  
All  
A-Z 0-9  
(4) Select an item that you want to edit with [  
] or [  
], and then  
press [OK].  
• Name  
• Destination  
• Coded Dial  
Fax  
<Apply>  
Name: CANON02  
Destination: 9876543...  
Coded Dial: 002  
(5) Select <Apply> with [  
(6) Select <Apply> with [  
] after editing, and then press [OK].  
], and then press [OK].  
Fax  
<Apply>  
Name: CANON02  
Destination: 9876543...  
Coded Dial: 002  
ꢀ When deleting a registered coded dial code  
(1) Press [  
].  
CANON 0123456789  
All A-Z  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢀ When deleting a registered coded dial code  
Storing/Editing from the Remote UI  
(1) Select the check box for which you want to delete the number, and  
then click [Delete].  
Start the web browser.  
1
2
Click [Not Registered] or the number which is not  
registered.  
5
Enter "http://<the IP address of the machine>/" in  
the address field, and then press the [ENTER] key  
on your keyboard.  
Input Example: "http://192.168.0.215/"  
Log on to the Remote UI.  
3
(1) Select [System Manager Mode].  
(2) Enter [System Manager ID] and [System Manager PIN].  
(3) Click [OK].  
Select [Fax] from [Type].  
6
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
Specify the required settings, and then click [OK].  
7
Click [Address] → [Coded Dial].  
4
(2)  
(1)  
(1)  
(2)  
ꢀ When storing a new coded dial code  
Proceed to Step 5.  
ꢀ When editing a registered coded dial code  
(1) Click the number or name.  
(2) Click [Edit].  
(3) Specify the required settings in the edit screen for destinations, and  
then click [OK].  
5-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Storing/Editing Recipients for Group Dialing  
You can perform the following procedures.  
• Registering group addresses  
(3) Select <One-Touch> or <Coded Dial> with [  
[OK].  
], and then press  
• Adding a recipient to group addresses  
• Deleting a recipient from group addresses  
• Changing a group name  
Register Dest.  
Coded Dial  
One-Touch  
• Deleting group addresses  
IMPORTANT  
(4) Select <Group> with [  
], and then press [OK].  
Before registering group addresses  
•
Register group addresses for an unused one-touch key or coded  
dial codes. Keep a one-touch key or coded dial available for group  
dialing.  
The recipients must be registered in one-touch keys or coded dial  
codes beforehand.  
Destination Type  
Fax  
Group  
•
(5) If you selected <One-Touch> in Step (3), select the number to be  
registered with [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK].  
Storing/Editing from the Operation Panel  
Enter Registration No.  
03 Not Registered  
04 Not Registered  
05 Not Registered  
06 Not Registered  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Address Book  
FAX Tone, Numeric keys  
(6) Confirm that <Name> is selected, and then press [OK].  
Group  
<Apply>  
Name:  
Destinations: 0  
One-Touch: 03  
(7) Use the numeric keys to specify <Name>.  
Back  
OK  
"Text Input Method" (→P.1-10)  
Name (Max 16 char.)  
GROUP  
<Apply>  
Press [  
].  
1
2
Entry Mode: A  
Press [  
] (Address Book).  
(8) Select <Apply> with [  
], and then press [OK].  
CANON01 012345678  
CANON02 98765432...  
CANON03 00112233...  
Name (Max 16 char.)  
GROUP  
<Apply>  
Entry Mode: A  
All A-Z  
ꢀ When registering new group addresses  
(1) Press [ ].  
(9) Select <Destinations> with [  
], and then press [OK].  
(2) Confirm that <Register New to Address Book> is selected, and then  
press [OK].  
Group  
<Apply>  
Name: GROUP  
Destinations:  
One-Touch: 03  
Register New to Addr  
Edit Address Book  
Address Book Details  
All  
A-Z  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
(10) Confirm that <Add> is selected, and then press [OK].  
(5) Confirm that <Add> is selected, and then press [OK].  
Destination  
<Apply>  
<Add>  
Destination  
<Apply>  
<Add>  
CANON01 0123456789  
CANON02 9876543210  
(11) Select a destination that you want to add with [  
then press [OK].  
] or [  
], and  
(6) Select a destination to be added with [  
press [OK].  
] or [  
], and then  
CAON01 01234567  
CAON02 9876543...  
CAON03 0011223...  
CAON01 0123456...  
CAON02 9876543...  
CAON03 00112233  
All  
A-Z 0-9  
All  
A-Z 0-9  
(12) Repeat Step (10) and (11) to select the destinations to be added.  
(7) Select <Apply> with [  
], and then press [OK].  
(13) Select <Apply> with [  
], and then press [OK].  
Destination  
<Apply>  
<Add>  
Destination  
<Apply>  
<Add>  
CANON01 01234567...  
CANON02 98765432...  
CANON01 0123456789  
CANON02 9876543210  
(8) Select <Apply> with [  
], and then press [OK].  
(14) Select <Apply> with [  
], and then press [OK].  
Group  
<Apply>  
Name: GROUP  
Destinations: 3  
One-Touch: 03  
Group  
<Apply>  
Name: GROUP  
Destinations: 2  
One-Touch: 03  
ꢀ When deleting the destination from registered group addresses  
(1) Press [ ].  
ꢀ When adding the recipients to registered group addresses  
(1) Press [ ].  
(2) Select <Edit Address Book> with [  
], and then press [OK].  
(2) Select <Edit Address Book> with [  
], and then press [OK].  
Register New to Add...  
Edit Address Book  
Address Book Details  
Register New to Add...  
Edit Address Book  
Address Book Details  
All  
A-Z  
All  
A-Z  
(3) Select a group in which destinations are deleted with [  
and then press [OK].  
] or [  
],  
(3) Select a group to which destinations are added with [  
and then press [OK].  
] or [  
],  
CAON02 9876543...  
CAON03 0011223...  
GROUP 3 Destinat  
CAON02 9876543...  
CAON03 0011223...  
GROUP 2 Destinat  
All  
A-Z 0-9  
All  
A-Z 0-9  
(4) Select <Destination> with [  
], and then press [OK].  
(4) Select <Destination> with [  
], and then press [OK].  
Group  
<Apply>  
Name: GROUP  
Destinations: 3  
One-Touch: 03  
Group  
<Apply>  
Name: GROUP  
Destinations: 2  
One-Touch: 03  
5-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(4) Confirm that <Name> is selected, and then press [OK].  
(5) Select a destination to be deleted with [  
press [OK].  
] or [  
], and then  
Group  
<Apply>  
Destination  
Name: GROUP  
Destinations: 2  
One-Touch: 03  
<Add>  
CANON01 01234567...  
CANON02 98765432...  
CANON03 001122334  
(5) Change <Name>.  
(6) Select <Delete from Group> with [  
], and then press [OK].  
Name (Max 16 char.)  
GROUP A  
<Apply>  
Fax  
<Delete from Group>  
Name: CANON03  
Destination: 0011223...  
Coded Dial: 003  
Entry Mode: A  
(6) Select <Apply> with [  
], and then press [OK].  
(7) Select <Yes> with [  
], and then press [OK].  
Name (Max 16 char.)  
GROUP A  
<Apply>  
Delete from group?  
Entry Mode: A  
Yes  
No  
] and then press [OK].  
(7) Select <Apply> with [  
], and then press [OK].  
(8) Select <Apply> with [  
Group  
<Apply>  
Destination  
<Apply>  
<Add>  
Name: GROUP A  
Destinations: 2  
One-Touch: 03  
CANON01 0123456789  
CANON02 9876543210  
ꢀ When deleting registered group addresses  
(1) Press [ ].  
(9) Select <Apply> with [  
], and then press [OK].  
(2) Select <Delete from Address Book> with [  
], and then press [OK].  
Group  
<Apply>  
Name: GROUP  
Destinations: 2  
One-Touch: 03  
Edit Address Book  
Address Book Details  
Delete from Address  
All  
A-Z  
ꢀ When changing group name of registered group addresses  
(1) Press [ ].  
(3) Select a group that you want to delete with [  
then press [OK].  
] or [  
], and  
(2) Select <Edit Address Book> with [  
], and then press [OK].  
CAON02 9876543...  
CAON03 0011223...  
GROUP 3 Destinat  
Register New to Add...  
Edit Address Book  
Address Book Details  
All  
A-Z 0-9  
All  
A-Z  
(4) Select <Yes> with [  
], and then press [OK].  
(3) Select a group for which the group name is changed with  
] or [ ], and then press [OK].  
[
Delete from  
address book?  
CAON02 9876543...  
CAON03 0011223...  
GROUP 2 Destinat  
Yes  
No  
All  
A-Z 0-9  
Press [  
] (Back) to close the menu screen.  
3
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢀ When deleting the destination from registered group addresses  
Storing/Editing from the Remote UI  
(1) Click the number or name.  
(2) Click [Edit].  
Start the web browser.  
1
2
(3) Select the destination from [Members List] to be deleted, and then  
click [Delete].  
(4) Click [OK].  
Enter "http://<the IP address of the machine>/" in  
the address field, and then press the [ENTER] key  
on your keyboard.  
ꢀ When changing group name of registered group addresses  
(1) Click the number or name.  
(2) Click [Edit].  
Input Example: "http://192.168.0.215/"  
(3) Change a name of [Group Name], and then click [OK].  
ꢀ When deleting registered group addresses  
(1) Select the check box for which you want to delete the number, and  
then click [Delete].  
Click [Not Registered] or the number which is not  
registered.  
5
Log on to the Remote UI.  
3
(1) Select [System Manager Mode].  
(2) Enter [System Manager ID] and [System Manager PIN].  
(3) Click [OK].  
(1)  
Select [Group] from [Type].  
6
(2)  
(3)  
Click [Address] → [One-Touch] or [Address] →  
[Coded Dial].  
4
(1)  
(2)  
Enter a name in [Group Name], and then click  
[Address Book].  
7
ꢀ When registering new group addresses  
Proceed to Step 5.  
(1)  
ꢀ When adding the recipients to registered group addresses  
(2)  
(1) Click the number or name.  
(2) Click [Edit].  
(3) Click [Address Book].  
(4) Click [One-Touch] or [Coded Dial] from the drop-down list, select the  
check box for the number to be added in a group, and then click [OK].  
5-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Click [One-Touch] or [Coded Dial] from the drop-  
down list, select the check box for the number to  
be registered in a group, and then click [OK].  
8
(3)  
(1)  
(2)  
Check if the registered destinations are displayed  
in [Members List], and then click [OK].  
9
(2)  
(1)  
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
6
Using the Fax Functions  
This section describes the procedure for using the fax functions.  
Basic Method for Sending Faxes  
6-2  
Changing the Default Values for Fax  
6-20  
Canceling Sending of Fax Documents  
6-2  
Changing the Fax Settings (Items Specified Using the  
Fax Settings  
6-3  
[Menu] Button)  
6-21  
Image Quality Settings  
Density Settings  
6-3  
6-3  
6-3  
Setting procedure for Sending  
Setting Items for the Send Settings  
Register Username  
Change Defaults  
6-21  
6-21  
6-22  
6-22  
6-22  
6-22  
6-22  
6-22  
6-22  
6-23  
6-23  
6-23  
Sharpness Settings  
Specifying Destinations  
6-4  
Sender ID  
Specifying Destinations by Entering a Fax Number  
Specifying Destinations Using the One-Touch Keys  
Specifying Destinations Using Coded Dial  
6-4  
6-4  
6-4  
6-5  
6-5  
Fax No.  
Select Line Type  
Offhook Alarm  
Specifying Destinations Using Group Dialing  
Specifying Destinations Using the Address Book  
ECM Sending  
Pause Time  
Auto Redial  
Redialing (Manual Redialing)  
Useful Fax Sending Methods  
6-6  
6-7  
Check Dial Tone Before Sending  
Setting Procedure for Receiving  
Setting Items for the Receive Settings  
2-Sided Printing (MF8350Cdn Only)  
Receive Data Reduction  
6-23  
6-24  
6-24  
6-24  
6-24  
6-24  
6-24  
6-25  
6-25  
6-25  
Sending a Fax after Making a Phone Call (Manual Sending)  
Push-button Telephone Service Using a Dial-line  
Sending a Fax Abroad (Adding Pauses)  
6-7  
6-7  
6-8  
Received Page Footer  
Sending to Multiple Destinations at a Time (Sequential Broadcast) 6-9  
Continue Printing When Toner Is Low  
ECM Receiving  
Receiving Faxes  
6-10  
Receive Mode  
6-10  
6-12  
6-13  
Incoming Ring  
Changing the Receive Mode  
Detailed Settings for the Fax/Tel Mode  
Remote Receiving  
Manual/Auto Switch  
System settings procedure  
Setting Items for the System Settings  
Send Start Speed  
6-25  
6-26  
6-26  
6-26  
6-26  
6-26  
6-27  
6-27  
6-27  
6-27  
6-27  
6-27  
Forwarding Fax Documents  
6-14  
Registering Forwarding Destinations (Automatic Forwarding) 6-14  
Forwarding Received Fax Documents in Memory to Other  
Receive Start Speed  
Destinations (Manual Forwarding)  
6-14  
Select Country/Region  
Re-forwarding/Printing/Deleting the Documents in which a  
Forwarding Error Occurs  
Memory Lock Settings  
6-15  
Address Book PIN  
Restrict New Destinations  
Allow Driver Faxing  
Checking/Handling Fax Documents in Memory 6-17  
Checking/Canceling Fax Transmission Documents  
Printing Received Fax Documents  
6-17  
6-17  
6-18  
6-19  
Restrict Sending from History  
Fax No. Confirmation Re-Entry  
Restrict Sequential Broadcast  
Checking/Deleting Received Fax Documents  
Checking the History of Received/Sent Fax Documents  
6-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
This section describes the basic procedure for  
sending faxes.  
Basic Method for Sending Faxes  
Place documents on the platen glass or load  
them in the feeder.  
"Placing Documents" (→P.2-4)  
"Documents Requirements" (→P.2-2)  
1
2
Specify the destination.  
Press [  
].  
These are the following methods to specify a destination.  
(For details, see P.6-4 to 6-5.)  
4
Entering the fax number  
One-touch keys  
Coded dialing  
Address book  
- Sequential broadcast  
( →P.6-9)  
Group dialing  
Specify destination.  
2010 01/01 12:52AM  
RX Mode: Auto  
Resolution: 200 x 100  
...  
Set scanning settings for documents as needed.  
There are the three items you can specify.  
(For details, see P.6-3.)  
Press [  
] (B & W).  
3
5 When placing documents on the platen glass  
Perform the following procedure.  
Image quality settings  
(1) Select the size of the original document with [ ] or [ ],  
and then press [OK].  
Density settings  
Sharpness settings  
(2) Press [  
] (B & W) for each document.  
(3) When all documents are scanned completely, select <Start  
Sending>, and then press [OK].  
The settings specified here are effective only for the current sending  
operation. To make the settings effective for all the copy operations, see  
"Changing the Default Values for Fax" (→P.6-20).  
Canceling Sending of Fax Documents  
When <Cancel?> appears, select <Yes> with [ ],  
and then press [OK].  
3
You can cancel a sending job that is in the process of being sent.  
Transmission is canceled.  
Press [  
Press [  
].  
1
2
] (Stop).  
6-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Fax Settings  
Image Quality Settings  
Fax mode screen  
Setting screen  
Image  
Quality  
Specify the scanning resolution.  
As you set a higher resolution you will get better resolution  
but the transmission time will be longer.  
Specify destination.  
2010 01/01 12:52AM  
Resolution  
200 x 100 dpi (Norma  
200 x 200 dpi (Fine)  
200 x 200 dpi (Phot...  
200 x 400 dpi (Supe...  
RX Mode: Auto  
Resolution: 200 x 1...  
<200 dpi x 100 dpi (Normal)>  
<200 dpi x 200 dpi (Fine)>  
For text documents  
For fine text documents  
<200 dpi x 200 dpi (Photo)>  
<200 dpi x 400 dpi (Superfine)>  
<400 dpi x 400 dpi (Ultrafine)>  
For documents that contain photographs  
For fine text documents  
For fine text documents  
Density Settings  
Fax mode screen  
Setting screen  
Specify the scanning density.  
Specify destination.  
Density  
Density  
2010 01/01 12:52AM  
-
v
+
RX Mode: Auto  
Resolution: 200 x 1...  
[
[
]
]
Makes the scanning density lighter.  
Makes the scanning density darker.  
Sharpness Settings  
Fax mode screen  
Setting screen  
You can emphasize the outline of the image in the  
document or decrease the contrast.  
Specify destination.  
2010 01/01 12:52AM  
Sharpness  
-
+
+
Density:  
0
-
+
Sharpness:  
0
-
Select <Sharpness> with [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK].  
If you want to clearly scan halftone dots which of printed photos,  
[
[
]
]
adjust the sharpness to <->. This can reduce the moire effect (patchy  
patterns called "moire").  
If you want to clearly scan text or lines, adjust the sharpness to <+>.  
This is appropriate for scanning documents which are blueprints or  
thinly penciled.  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Specifying Destinations  
Specifying Destinations  
Specifying Destinations by Entering a Fax Number  
Specify the fax number with the numeric keys, [  
] (Tone), and [  
] (Symbols).  
Correcting destinations  
•
Canceling destinations  
Press and hold [  
] (Clear).  
•
Deleting the last character of a destination  
Press [  
] (Clear).  
Specifying Destinations Using the One-Touch Keys  
Press the one-touch key (01 to 19) of the destination.  
To use this feature, you need to register destinations in one-touch keys beforehand.  
"Storing/Editing One-Touch Keys" (→P.5-3)  
If incorrect keys are pressed  
After pressing [  
] (Reset), repeat the procedure from specifying the settings for the document scanning.  
Specifying Destinations Using Coded Dial  
Press [  
] (Coded Dial), and then enter the three-digit registration number (001 to  
181) with the numeric keys.  
To use this feature, you need to register destinations in coded dials beforehand.  
"Storing/Editing Coded Dial Codes" (→P.5-6)  
If incorrect keys are pressed  
After pressing [  
] (Reset), repeat the procedure from specifying the settings for the document scanning.  
6-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Specifying destinations  
Specifying Destinations Using Group Dialing  
When the numbers are registered in a one-touch key  
Press the one-touch key (01 to 19) in which destination groups are registered.  
When the numbers are registered in a coded dial code  
Press [  
keys.  
] (Coded Dial), and then enter the three-digit registration number (001 to 181) with the numeric  
To use this feature, you need to register destinations in a group address beforehand.  
"Storing/Editing Recipients for Group Dialing" (→P.5-9)  
If incorrect keys are pressed  
After pressing [  
] (Reset), repeat the procedure from specifying the settings for the document scanning.  
Specifying Destinations Using the Address Book  
After entering the characters from the operation panel and searching the abbreviation of destinations from the registered  
address book (one-touch keys, coded dial, or group dialing), the destinations to be specified appear on the display. You can  
specify the displayed address as a destination.  
To use this feature, you need to register destinations in the address book beforehand.  
"Registering Destinations in the Address Book" (→P.5-1)  
Press [  
] (Address Book).  
1
2
Search for the recipient using [ ] or [ ].  
Selecting <All> displays all the recipients.  
CANON 012XXXXXX  
GroupA 2 Destin...  
User01 012xxxxx...  
All  
A-Z  
Select a recipient with [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK].  
3
CANON 012XXXXXX  
GroupA 2 Destin...  
User01 012xxxxx...  
All  
A-Z  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Redialing (Manual Redialing)  
You can redial a number which you dialed the last time.  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Redial  
FAX  
OK  
Start  
Place documents on the platen glass or load them  
in the feeder.  
1
"Placing Documents" (→P.2-4)  
"Documents Requirements" (→P.2-2)  
Press [  
Press [  
].  
2
3
4
] (Redial).  
Select a recipient with [ ] or [ ], and then press  
[OK].  
Redial  
012XXXXXX  
Press [  
] (B & W).  
5
NOTE- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Destinations that can be redialed  
•
A destination entered with the numeric keys  
•
Up to the last three destinations  
(Only the last destination when using (Hook))  
When restricting the sending function  
Redialing is not available.  
"Restrict Sending from History" (→P.6-27)  
When turning this machine OFF  
The registered address for redialing is deleted.  
When sending by automatic redialing  
"Auto Redial" (→P.6-23)  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
6-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Useful Fax Sending Methods  
Sending a Fax after Making a Phone Call (Manual Sending)  
Push-button Telephone Service Using a Dial-line  
Send a fax manually in the following cases.  
• If you want to make a phone call before sending fax  
documents  
• If the recipient's fax machine cannot receive a fax  
automatically  
Some types of push-button telephone services require  
the availability of a push-button line (e.g., banks, airline  
reservations, and hotel reservations). If this machine is  
connected using a dial-line, you can send the tone signal  
temporarily using the following procedures.  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Keys to be used for this operation  
FAX  
Numeric keys  
Hook  
FAX  
Start  
Tone, Numeric keys  
Connect an external telephone to this machine.  
1
2
Press [  
Press [  
].  
] (Hook), and check the dial tone.  
1
2
For details on connecting, see the following.  
e-Manual → Setting Up the Machine → Specifying Initial Fax  
Settings and Connecting a Telephone Cable → Connecting a  
Telephone Line  
The dial tone sounds.  
Place documents in the feeder.  
Use the numeric keys to dial the desired  
information service.  
3
"Placing Documents" (→P.2-4)  
"Documents Requirements" (→P.2-2)  
Specify destination.  
2010 01/01 12:52AM  
012XXXXXX  
Start Receiving  
Resolution: 200 x 1...  
Press [  
].  
3
4
Set scanning settings for documents as needed.  
"Fax Settings" (→P.6-3)  
Check the dial tone using the handset of the  
external telephone.  
5
The dial tone sounds.  
Dial the recipient's fax number.  
6
7
Talk through the handset to the recipient.  
When you hear a beep, proceed to Step 9.  
Ask the recipient to set their fax machine to  
receive faxes.  
8
9
When you hear a beep, press [  
hang up the handset.  
] (B & W), and  
After completing the scanning, you can send the fax documents.  
NOTE- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Restrictions for manual sending  
When placing documents on the platen glass, only one page can be  
sent. Furthermore, the group dialing function is not available.  
Check the dial tone before entering a fax number.  
If you enter the number before checking the dial tone, the call may  
not be connected or the wrong number may be dialed.  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
After responding to the recoded message of the  
Place documents on the platen glass or load them  
in the feeder.  
4
1
information service, press [  
] (Tone).  
You can switch to the tone signal.  
"Placing Documents" (→P.2-4)  
"Documents Requirements" (→P.2-2)  
Specify destination.  
2010 01/01 12:52AM  
012XXXXXXT  
Start Receiving  
Resolution: 200 x 1...  
Press [  
].  
2
3
Set scanning settings for documents as needed.  
"Fax Settings" (→P.6-3)  
Use the numeric keys to enter the international  
access code.  
For details on international access codes, contact the telephone  
company you are subscribed with.  
4
Use the numeric keys to enter the required  
numbers for the information service.  
5
6
Specify destination.  
2010 01/01 12:52AM  
012XXXXXXT3456  
Start Receiving  
Fax  
012  
Resolution: 200 x 1...  
If you want to send faxes, press [  
] (B & W).  
Press [  
] (Pause) to enter a pause as needed.  
5
NOTE- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Telephone call  
The external telephone must be connected to this machine.  
• The letter <p> indicating a pause is displayed.  
• A pause in the number represents a 2-second pause. To change  
the pause time, see "Pause Time" (→P.6-23).  
Check the dial tone before entering a fax number.  
If you enter the number before checking the dial tone, the call may  
not be connected or the wrong number may be dialed.  
• When you are adding pauses consecutively, press [  
] (Pause)  
again.  
Fax  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Sending a Fax Abroad (Adding Pauses)  
012P  
When sending a fax abroad, you may need to insert a pause  
within the number.  
When communicating abroad, the signal distance is extreme  
and the signal route complicated. Because of this, you may not  
be able to connect to a recipient by dialing an international  
telephone identification number, country code, and the  
recipient's fax number at the same time. In this case, add a  
pause after the international telephone identification number.  
Because adding a pause provides a point where wait time can  
be added when dialing, it is easier to connect to the recipient.  
Enter the country code, the area code, and the  
fax/telephone number using the numeric keys.  
6
Fax  
012p031XXXXXX  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Pause  
FAX  
Numeric keys  
Start  
6-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Press [  
] (Pause) to add a pause at the end of  
Select a method for adding destinations with [ ] or  
7
8
3
the fax/telephone number as needed.  
[
], and then press [OK].  
• The letter <P> is displayed at the end of the fax number.  
• The pause added to the end of the number is fixed at 10  
seconds.  
• Fax (New)  
• Address Book  
• Coded Dial  
"Specifying Destinations" (→P.6-4)  
Fax  
Add Destination  
Fax (New)  
Address Book  
Coded Dial  
012p031XXXXXXP  
Press [  
] (B & W).  
Repeat Step 2 and 3 to enter all the destinations.  
4
5
Sending to Multiple Destinations at a Time  
(Sequential Broadcast)  
Press [  
] (B & W).  
NOTE- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
The number of destinations capable of sequential  
broadcast  
You can send the same document to multiple destinations.  
Keys to be used for this operation  
You can select destinations in the following combinations.  
Specifying destinations using numeric keys: Only one destination  
One-touch keys: Up to 19 destinations  
Numeric keys  
•
•
•
Coded dial codes: Up to 181 destinations  
When specifying destinations using the numeric keys  
Enter the numbers, and then press [OK].  
When checking the specified destinations  
Select <Confirm/Delete Dest.> with [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK].  
Specify destination.  
2010 01/01 12:52AM  
Add Destination  
Confirm/Delete Dest.  
OK  
Start  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Place documents on the platen glass or load them  
in the feeder.  
1
2
"Placing Documents" (→P.2-4)  
"Documents Requirements" (→P.2-2)  
Select <Add Destination> with [ ] or [ ], and  
then press [OK].  
Specify destination.  
2010 01/01 12:52AM  
Add Destination  
Confirm/Delete Dest.  
6-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
This section describes the procedure for receiving faxes.  
Receiving Faxes  
Receive Mode  
Your machine provides several methods for receiving fax documents. You can receive documents automatically or manually.  
Follow the chart below to choose the fax receive mode that best suits your needs.  
The default setting is <Auto>.  
Receives a fax automatically.  
Auto mode  
The machine's operation changes depending on whether an external telephone is connected.  
Operation for when an incoming call is received  
Without an external telephone connected  
With an external telephone connected  
When the call is a fax  
The machine receives  
the fax automatically.  
When the call is a voice call  
The machine does not respond.  
An incoming call rings for the specified number of times. *  
When you pick up the handset while the  
When you do not pick up the handset while  
incoming call rings  
the incoming call rings  
When the call is a fax  
When the call is a  
voice call  
When the call is a fax  
The machine receives the  
fax automatically.  
When the call is a  
You can hear a beep.  
Following the procedure  
below, receive the fax.  
(1) Press [Fax].  
voice call  
You cannot start talking.  
You can start talking  
as is.  
(2) Select <Start Receiving>  
with [ ] or [ ], and then  
press [OK].  
(3) Hang up the handset.  
* You can change the number of times the incoming call rings in "Incoming Ring" on P. 6-25.  
6-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Receives a fax automatically. (An incoming call rings. To configure so that the incoming call does not ring,  
see "Incoming Ring" (→P.6-25))  
Fax/Tel mode  
Respond to a telephone call by picking up the handset.  
Operation for when an incoming call is received  
An incoming call rings for the specified number of times.*1  
When you pick up the handset within  
the specified number of times  
When you do not pick up the handset  
within the specified number of times  
When the call is a fax  
When the call  
is a voice call  
The machine judges whether the  
incoming call is a fax or voice call.*2  
You can hear a  
beep.Following the  
procedure below, receive the  
fax.  
You can start  
talking as is.  
(1) Press [Fax].  
(2) Select <Start Receiving>  
with [ ] or [ ], and then  
press [OK].  
When the call is  
When the call is  
a voice call  
The telephone rings.*3  
a fax  
The machine receives  
the fax automatically.  
(3) Hang up the handset.  
*1 You can change the number of times the incoming call  
rings in "Incoming Ring" on P. 6-25.  
2
3
4
*
*
*
You can set the time taken to judge in <Ring Start  
Time>.  
You can change the ringing time in <Incoming Ring  
Time>.  
When you pick up the  
handset during ringing  
You can start talking as is.  
When you do not pick up  
the handset during ringing  
The machine hangs up the  
telephone or switches to the fax  
receive mode.*4  
Specify which operation is performed in <After Ring>.  
The above settings between *2 and *4 can be specified in  
"Detailed Settings for the Fax/Tel Mode" on P. 6-13.  
Receives a fax automatically.  
Answer mode  
The answering machine records a message for telephone calls.  
Operation for when an incoming call is received  
The telephone rings the number of times specified for the built-in  
answering machine.*1  
When you pick up the handset during  
ringing  
When the built-in answering machine  
starts up  
When the call is a fax  
When the call is a  
voice call  
You can start talking as  
is.  
When the call is a fax  
The machine receives the  
fax automatically.  
When the call is a  
voice call  
The built-in answering  
machine records the  
message.*2  
You can hear a beep.  
Following the procedure  
below, receive the fax.  
(1) Press [Fax].  
(2) Select <Start Receiving>  
with [ ] or [ ], and then  
press [OK].  
1
*
*
Set your answering machine to answer after a few rings.  
Record a message on your answering machine.  
(It is recommend that you insert about 4 seconds of silence at the  
beginning of the message or limit the message within 20 seconds.)  
2
(3) Hang up the handset.  
6-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Because this machine rings when receiving both fax and telephone calls, pick up the handset to respond to the call manually.  
This mode is a suitable option if you expect to use the machine mainly as a telephone, and only occasionally receive fax documents.  
Manual mode  
Operation for when an incoming call is received  
The external phone rings.  
When you pick up the handset while the  
telephone rings  
When you do not pick up the handset while  
the telephone rings  
The machine cannot receive a call or fax.*1  
When the call is a fax  
When the call is a voice call  
You can hear a beep.  
Following the procedure  
below, receive the fax.*2  
(1) Press [Fax].  
You can start talking as is.  
1
2
(2) Select <Start Receiving>  
with [ ] or [ ], and then  
press [OK].  
*
If "Manual/Auto Switch" (P. 6-25) is set to <On>, the machine switches to the  
fax receive operation automatically when the machine rings for a certain  
time.  
When "Remote Receiving" (P. 6-25) is set, you can also receive fax  
documents by dialing from your telephone.  
*
(3) Hang up the handset.  
The DRPD service allows you to assign distinctive ring patterns for two phone numbers on a single telephone line.  
Your machine will automatically monitor incoming calls and, based on the ring pattern, will let you know if the incoming  
call is a fax or voice call. Set the fax ring pattern that matches the pattern assigned by your telephone company.  
Contact your telephone company for availability.  
DRPD  
(Distinctive Ring  
Pattern Detection)  
mode  
Changing the Receive Mode  
Select a receive mode with [ ] or [ ], and then  
press [OK].  
3
Select the fax receive mode to suit your needs.  
Receive Mode  
Auto  
Fax/Tel  
Keys to be used for this operation  
FAX  
Manual  
Answer  
If you select <Fax/Tel> and press [OK], you need to specify the detailed  
settings. See "Detailed Settings for the Fax/Tel Mode" (→P.6-13) and specify  
the settings.  
If you select <DRPD: Select Fax>  
Press [ ] or [ ] to select a ring pattern, and then press [OK].  
OK  
Press [  
].  
1
2
Select <RX Mode> with [ ] or [ ], and then press  
[OK].  
Specify destination.  
2010 01/01 12:52AM  
RX Mode: Auto  
Resolution: 200 x 1...  
6-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Detailed Settings for the Fax/Tel Mode  
Fax/Tel  
<Apply>  
Set the ringing time or the operations for the Fax/Tel mode.  
Ring Start Time: 6  
Incoming Ring Time: ...  
After Ring: Receive  
Keys to be used for this operation  
FAX  
OK  
Press [  
].  
1
2
Select <RX Mode> with [ ] or [ ], and then  
press [OK].  
Specify destination.  
2010 01/01 12:52AM  
RX Mode: Auto  
Resolution: 200 x 1...  
Select <Fax/Tel> with [ ] or [ ], and then press  
[OK].  
3
4
Receive Mode  
Auto  
Fax/Tel  
Manual  
Answer  
Select an item to be specified with [ ] or [ ],  
and then press [OK].  
Fax/Tel  
<Apply>  
Ring Start Time: 6  
Incoming Ring Time: ...  
After Ring: Receive  
<Ring Start Time>  
Specify the duration for which the machine attempts  
to detect the fax tone before it starts ringing. Specify a  
duration between 5 seconds and 30 seconds, and then  
press [OK].  
<Incoming Ring Time> Set the ringing time. Specify a duration between 15  
seconds and 300 seconds, and then press [OK].  
<After Ring>  
Specify the operation for when the phone is not picked  
up during calling. Select <End> or <Receive>, and then  
press [OK].  
- <End>:  
Disconnects the call.  
- <Receive>: Receives a fax.  
Select <Apply> with [ ] or [ ], and then press  
[OK].  
5
The receive mode is changed.  
6-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Forwarding Fax Documents  
There are two forwarding methods: registering a forwarding  
destination beforehand (automatic forwarding) and selecting a  
fax document received in the memory (manual forwarding).  
Select <Forwarding Settings> with [ ] or [ ],  
and then press [OK].  
3
4
"
Registering Forwarding Destinations (Automatic  
System Settings  
Dept. ID Management  
Network Settings  
Communications Sett...  
Forwarding Settings  
" (→  
)
Forwarding) P.6-14  
"
Forwarding Received Fax Documents in Memory to Other  
" (→  
)
Destinations (Manual Forwarding) P.6-14  
Also, if a forwarding error occurs, see the following section.  
"
Re-forwarding/Printing/Deleting the Documents in which a  
" (→  
)
Forwarding Error Occurs P.6-15  
Select <On> with [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK].  
Registering Forwarding Destinations  
(Automatic Forwarding)  
Forwarding Settings  
Off  
On  
You can forward received documents to a specified destination.  
IMPORTANT  
Setting for <Forwarding Settings>  
You can specify also from the Remote UI.  
<Off>  
<On>  
Does not specify the forwarding setting.  
Enables the forwarding setting.  
e-Manual Setting and Managing from Computer Setting Transfer  
→
→
Select a forwarding destination with [ ] or [ ],  
and then press [OK].  
5
6
Keys to be used for this operation  
Menu  
Log In/Out  
CAON01 01234567  
CAON02 9876543...  
CAON03 0011223...  
All  
A-Z 0-9  
Press [  
] (Menu) to close the menu screen.  
OK  
Forwarding Received Fax Documents in Memory  
to Other Destinations (Manual Forwarding)  
Press [  
] (Menu).  
1
2
You can specify destinations and send a document in memory.  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Select <System Settings> with [ ] or [ ], and  
then press [OK].  
Status Monitor/Cancel  
Menu  
Printer Settings  
Timer Settings  
Adjustment/Cleaning  
System Settings  
When the system manager ID and system manager PIN are  
specified  
Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number, and then press  
[
] (ID).  
OK  
Start  
Sys. Manager ID/PIN  
Login: Press ID  
Logout: Press ID  
Manager ID: 0123456  
PIN: *******  
Press [  
] (Status Monitor/Cancel).  
1
6-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Re-forwarding/Printing/Deleting the  
Select <Fax Job Status/History> with [ ] or [ ],  
and then press [OK].  
2
3
4
Documents in which a Forwarding Error Occurs  
Status Monitor/Cancel  
Device Status  
Copy Job Status  
Fax Job Status/Histo  
Print Job Status/Hi...  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Status Monitor/Cancel  
Select <Receive Job Status> with [ ] or [ ], and  
then press [OK].  
Fax Job Status/History  
Send Job Status  
Receive Job Status  
Job History  
OK  
Forwarding Error Sta...  
Press [  
] (Status Monitor/Cancel).  
1
2
Select a job that you want to forward with [ ] or  
[
], and then press [OK].  
Select <Fax Job Status/History> with [ ] or [ ],  
and then press [OK].  
You cannot forward the received fax documents in the following  
conditions.  
• In the middle of a receiving operation  
• In the middle of a normal printing operation after completion of  
receiving  
Status Monitor/Cancel  
Device Status  
Copy Job Status  
Fax Job Status/Histo  
Print Job Status/Hi...  
Fax Receive Job Status  
12:52AM Receiving  
12:54AM Waiting:RX  
Select <Forwarding Error Status> with [ ] or [ ],  
and then press [OK].  
3
4
Select <Forward> with [ ] or [ ], and then press  
[OK].  
5
6
Fax Job Status/History  
Send Job Status  
Receive Job Status  
Job History  
Details  
<Delete>  
<Forward>  
Job Number: 0004  
Status: Waiting to...  
Forwarding Error Stat  
Select a job to be forwarded, printed, or deleted  
with [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK].  
Specify the forwarding destination.  
You can specify the destination only with one-touch keys or coded  
dial codes.  
Fax Forwarding Errors  
12:52AM OK  
12:54AM Failed #018  
"Specifying Destinations" (→P.6-4)  
CANON 012XXXXXX  
GroupA 2 Destin...  
User01 012xxxxx...  
The detailed information is displayed.  
Details  
<Delete>  
<Print>  
All  
A-Z  
<Forward>  
Job Number: 0004  
Press [  
] (B & W).  
7
For forwarding  
(1) Select <Forward> with [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK].  
Details  
<Delete>  
<Print>  
<Forward>  
Job Number: 0004  
6-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
(2) Specify the forwarding destination.  
You can specify the destination only by one-touch keys or  
coded dial codes.  
"Specifying Destinations" (→P.6-4)  
CANON 012XXXXXX  
GroupA 2 Destin...  
User01 012xxxxx...  
All  
A-Z  
(3) Press [  
] (Status Monitor/Cancel) to close the screen.  
For printing  
(1) Select <Print> with [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK].  
Details  
<Delete>  
<Print>  
<Forward>  
Job Number: 0004  
(2) Select <Yes> with [ ], and then press [OK].  
Print?  
Yes  
No  
(3) Press [  
] (Status Monitor/Cancel) to close the screen.  
For deleting  
(1) Select <Delete> with [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK].  
Details  
<Delete>  
<Print>  
<Forward>  
Job Number: 0004  
(2) Select <Yes> with [ ], and then press [OK].  
The job will be deleted.  
Delete?  
Yes  
No  
(3) Press [  
] (Status Monitor/Cancel) to close the screen.  
6-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Checking/Handling Fax Documents in Memory  
The detailed information is displayed.  
You can check the status of or handle fax documents in  
memory.  
Details  
<Cancel>  
Checking/Canceling Fax Transmission  
Documents  
Job Number: 0004  
Status: Sending  
Time: 01/01 12:52AM  
You can check the details of fax documents currently being  
sent or waiting to be sent. You can also delete unnecessary  
documents.  
For canceling  
(1) Select <Cancel> with [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK].  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Details  
<Cancel>  
Status Monitor/Cancel  
Job Number: 0004  
Status: Sending  
Time: 01/01 12:52AM  
The sending job is canceled. Fax transmission to all the  
destinations will be canceled for sequential broadcast.  
(2) Select <Yes> with [  
], and then press [OK].  
Cancel?  
OK  
Yes  
No  
(3) Press [  
] (Status Monitor/Cancel) to close the screen.  
Press [  
] (Status Monitor/Cancel).  
1
2
For checking only  
Select <Fax Job Status/History> with [ ] or [ ],  
and then press [OK].  
Press [  
] (Status Monitor/Cancel) to close the screen.  
Status Monitor/Cancel  
Device Status  
Printing Received Fax Documents  
Copy Job Status  
Fax Job Status/Histo  
Print Job Status/Hi...  
You can print fax documents saved in the memory.  
NOTE- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
When printing received documents  
•
You cannot choose and print a received document. All the fax  
documents saved in the memory are to be printed.  
The preview function for received documents is not provided.  
Select <Send Job Status> with [ ] or [ ], and  
then press [OK].  
3
4
•
If time is specified in <Memory Lock Time>  
Fax documents are printed automatically at <Memory Lock End  
Time>.  
Fax Job Status/History  
Send Job Status  
Receive Job Status  
Job History  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Forwarding Error Sta...  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Menu  
Log In/Out  
Select a job to be checked or canceled with [ ] or  
[
], and then press [OK].  
Send Fax Job Status  
12:52AM Sending  
12:54AM Waiting:Scan  
OK  
Press [  
] (Menu).  
1
6-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Checking/Deleting Received Fax Documents  
Select <System Settings> with [ ] or [ ], and  
then press [OK].  
2
You can check detailed information about fax documents  
saved in memory. You can also delete unnecessary documents.  
Menu  
Printer Settings  
Timer Settings  
Adjustment/Cleaning  
System Settings  
NOTE- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Stored documents in memory  
You can specify the destination to forward the documents.  
"Forwarding Received Fax Documents in Memory to Other  
Destinations (Manual Forwarding)" (→P.6-14)  
You can print stored documents.  
When the system manager ID and system manager PIN are  
specified  
Use the numeric keys to enter the ID and number, and then press  
"Printing Received Fax Documents" (→P.6-17)  
[
] (ID).  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Sys. Manager ID/PIN  
Login: Press ID  
Logout: Press ID  
Manager ID: 0123456  
PIN: *******  
Status Monitor/Cancel  
Select <Communications Settings> with [ ] or  
3
4
[
], and then press [OK].  
System Settings  
Device Information  
Dept. ID Management  
Network Settings  
Communications Setti  
OK  
Select <Memory Lock Settings> with [ ] or [ ],  
and then press [OK].  
Press [  
] (Status Monitor/Cancel).  
1
2
If <Memory Lock PIN> is specified, use the numeric keys to enter it,  
and then press [OK].  
Select <Fax Job Status/History> with [ ] or [ ],  
and then press [OK].  
Communication Settings  
Fax Settings  
Memory Lock Settings  
Select Country/Region  
Status Monitor/Cancel  
Device Status  
Copy Job Status  
Fax Job Status/Histo  
Print Job Status/Hi...  
Select <Off> with [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK].  
5
6
Select <Receive Job Status> with [ ] or [ ], and  
then press [OK].  
3
4
Memory Lock Settings  
Off  
On  
Fax Job Status/History  
Send Job Status  
Receive Job Status  
Job History  
Forwarding Error Sta...  
Fax documents saved in the memory are printed.  
Press [  
] (Menu) to close the menu screen.  
Select a job to be checked or deleted with [ ] or  
[
], and then press [OK].  
Fax Receive Job Status  
12:52AM Receiving  
12:54AM Waiting:RX  
6-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The detailed information is displayed.  
Select <Job History> with [ ] or [ ], and then  
press [OK].  
3
4
Details  
<Delete>  
<Forward>  
Job Number: 0004  
Status: Receiving  
Fax Job Status/History  
Send Job Status  
Receive Job Status  
Job History  
Forwarding Error Sta...  
For deleting  
(1) Select <Delete> with [ ] or [ ], and then press [OK].  
Details  
<Delete>  
<Forward>  
Job Number: 0004  
Status: Receiving  
Select a job to be checked with [ ] or [ ], and  
then press [OK].  
The detailed information is displayed.  
Fax History  
02:07AM Failed #018  
11:19PM Failed #018  
00:00AM Failed #099  
(2) Select <Yes> with [  
], and then press [OK].  
Delete?  
Yes  
No  
Select an item to be checked with [ ] or [ ], and  
then press [OK].  
5
6
The received job is deleted.  
(3) Press [ ] (Status Monitor/Cancel) to close the screen.  
Details  
Job Numbe: 0004  
Result: Failed #018  
Started: 01/01 12:5...  
Duration: 00'00  
For checking only  
Press [  
] (Status Monitor/Cancel) to close the screen.  
Checking the History of Received/Sent Fax  
Documents  
Press [  
] (Status Monitor/Cancel) to close the  
screen.  
You can check the history of received or sent documents.  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Status Monitor/Cancel  
OK  
Press [  
] (Status Monitor/Cancel).  
1
2
Select <Fax Job Status/History> with [ ] or [ ],  
and then press [OK].  
Status Monitor/Cancel  
Device Status  
Copy Job Status  
Fax Job Status/Histo  
Print Job Status/Hi...  
6-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Changing the Default Values for Fax  
The default values for fax are those functions which are applied  
Select <Change Defaults> with [ ] or [ ], and  
then press [OK].  
5
automatically when [  
] (Reset) is pressed or the power is  
turned ON. You can change the default values to suit your  
needs.  
Send Settings  
Register Username  
Change Defaults  
Sender ID  
You can register the following types of settings as the default  
values.  
• Resolution  
• Density  
• Sharpness  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Select a setting item with [ ] or [ ], and then  
press [OK].  
6
Menu  
• Resolution/Density/Sharpness  
For details on settings, see "Fax Settings" (→P.6-3).  
Change Defaults  
<Apply>  
Resolution: 200 x 100  
+
Density: 0  
Sharpness: 0  
-
-
+
After specifying the setting, select <Apply> with  
7
8
OK  
[
] or [ ], and then press [OK].  
Change Defaults  
<Apply>  
Press [  
] (Menu).  
1
2
Resolution: 200 x 100  
Select <Send/Receive Settings> with [ ] or [ ],  
and then press [OK].  
+
Density: 0  
Sharpness: 0  
-
+
-
Menu  
Common Settings  
Copy Settings  
Press [  
] (Menu) to close the menu screen.  
Memory Media Settin...  
Send/Receive Setting  
Select <Common Settings> with [ ] or [ ], and  
then press [OK].  
3
4
Send/Receive Settings  
Common Settings  
Fax Settings  
Select <Send Settings> with [ ] or [ ], and then  
press [OK].  
Common Settings  
Send Settings  
Receive Settings  
6-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Changing the Fax Settings (Items Specified Using the [Menu] Button)  
Change the settings for sending and receiving faxes.  
For details on the procedure for setting specifications or the  
setting items, see the next items.  
Select <Send Settings> with [ ] or [ ], and then  
press [OK].  
4
"Setting procedure for Sending" (→P.6-21)  
Fax Settings  
Basic Settings  
Send Settings  
"Setting Items for the Send Settings" (→P.6-21)  
"Setting Procedure for Receiving" (→P.6-23)  
"Setting Items for the Receive Settings" (→P.6-24)  
Receive Settings  
"System settings procedure" (→P.6-25)  
Fax Setup Guide  
"Setting Items for the System Settings" (→P.6-26)  
Setting procedure for Sending  
Select <ECM Sending> with [ ] or [ ], and then  
press [OK].  
5
Specify the settings for sending using the following procedure.  
This section describes the procedure for changing the setting  
for "ECM Sending" as an example.  
Send Settings  
ECM Sending  
Pause Time  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Auto Redial  
Check Dial Tone Befo...  
Menu  
Select <Off> or <On> with [ ] or [ ], and then  
press [OK].  
6
ECM Sending  
Off  
On  
OK  
* When <Apply> appears in the screen, you need to select <Apply>  
and press [OK] after specifying the setting.  
Press [  
] (Menu).  
1
2
Press [  
The setting is complete.  
] (Menu) to close the menu screen.  
7
Select <Send/Receive Settings> with [ ] or [ ],  
and then press [OK].  
Setting Items for the Send Settings  
Menu  
Common Settings  
Copy Settings  
Memory Media Settin...  
Send/Receive Setting  
The send settings include the following items.  
Send/Receive Settings  
"Register Username" (→P.6-22)  
Common  
Settings  
Send Settings  
Basic Settings  
"Change Defaults" (→P.6-22)  
"Sender ID" (→P.6-22)  
Select <Fax Settings> with [ ] or [ ], and then  
press [OK].  
3
"Fax No." (→P.6-22)  
"Select Line Type" (→P.6-22)  
"Offhook Alarm" (→P.6-22)  
"ECM Sending" (→P.6-22)  
"Pause Time" (→P.6-23)  
Send/Receive Settings  
Common Settings  
Fax Settings  
Fax Settings  
Send Settings  
"Auto Redial" (→P.6-23)  
"Check Dial Tone Before Sending" (→P.6-23)  
6-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Settings  
Register Username  
You can enter numbers with the numeric keys (up to 20  
characters).  
Your name or company's name must be registered as the  
machine's name.  
When you send a document, the name that you registered is  
printed as the sender's name on the recipient's paper.  
Select Line Type  
Change the setting if you cannot send faxes.  
If you are not sure about your telephone line type, contact your  
local telephone company.  
How to display the settings  
[
] → <Send/Receive Settings> → <Common Settings> →  
<Send Settings> → <Register Username>  
How to display the settings  
Settings  
[
] → <Send/Receive Settings> → <Fax Settings> → <Basic  
You can enter characters (up to 24 characters).  
Settings> → <Select Line Type>  
"Text Input Method" (→P.1-10)  
Settings  
(Boldface: Default settings)  
NOTE- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
How to use a username  
When you send a document, the sender information that you  
Dial 10 PPS  
Specify when you are using a dial-line.  
Specify when you are using a tone-line.  
registered is printed on the recipient's paper.  
Tone  
Page Number/  
Total Number of Pages  
Fax/Telephone Number  
(FAX No.)  
Sender Name  
(User name)  
O ff hook Alarm  
Job Number  
Sending Time/Date  
Specifies whether the machine makes an alarm sound when  
the telephone handset is off the hook.  
2010 01/01 02:07 123XXXXXXX  
CANON  
#0001 P.001/006  
You can also set the volume of the alarm sound.  
How to display the settings  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
[
] → <Send/Receive Settings> → <Fax Settings> → <Basic  
Settings> → <Offhook Alarm>  
Change Defaults  
Settings  
(Boldface: Default settings)  
You can change the settings for when turning the power ON or  
pressing [  
] (Reset).  
Off  
Does not make an alarm sound.  
How to display the settings  
Offhook Alarm Volume:  
1 to 3  
Makes an alarm sound at the specified  
volume.  
On  
[
] → <Send/Receive Settings> → <Common Settings> →  
<Send Settings> → <Change Defaults>  
ECM Sending  
Settings  
For details on the settings, see the following item.  
The ECM (Error Correction Mode) is a function for detecting  
and correcting errors during fax communication. Using the  
ECM function can diminish send errors even with a difficult  
telephone line.  
"Changing the Default Values for Fax" (→P.6-20)  
Sender ID  
You can specify whether the sender ID is added to a document  
to be sent.  
The sender ID is printed on the top of the sent document.  
Information such as your fax number and name is printed,  
enabling the recipient to know who sent the document.  
NOTE- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Check the settings for the recipient's machine also.  
The ECM function is available only when the setting for the machine  
and recipient's machine are enabled.  
Even if the ECM function is enabled  
An error may occur due to the telephone line.  
How to display the settings  
When the ECM function is enabled  
It may take time to send documents if a problem occurs with the  
telephone line.  
[
] → <Send/Receive Settings> → <Common Settings> →  
<Send Settings> → <Sender ID>  
Settings  
(Boldface: Default settings)  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Off  
The sender ID is not added.  
Print Location:  
On Image, Above Image  
Select the location where the sender ID  
is printed.  
On  
Mark No. as TEL/FAX:  
FAX, TEL  
Select a character to be added in front  
of a telephone number.  
Fax No.  
Register your machine's fax number.  
How to display the settings  
[
] → <Send/Receive Settings> → <Fax Settings> → <Basic  
Settings> → <Fax No.>  
6-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
How to display the settings  
Setting Procedure for Receiving  
[
] → <Send/Receive Settings> → <Fax Settings> → <Send  
Settings> → <ECM Sending>  
Specify the settings for receiving using the following procedure.  
This section describes the procedure for changing the setting  
for "ECM Receiving" as an example.  
Settings  
(Boldface: Default settings)  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Off  
Does not use the ECM function.  
Uses the ECM function.  
Menu  
On  
Pause Time  
Specify the number of seconds for a pause when [  
is pressed.  
] (Pause)  
For deatails on adding pauses, see "Sending a Fax Abroad  
(Adding Pauses)" (→P.6-8)  
How to display the settings  
[
] → <Send/Receive Settings> → <Fax Settings> → <Send  
Settings> → <Pause Time>  
OK  
Settings  
(Boldface: Default settings)  
1 to 2 to 15 (seconds)  
Press [  
] (Menu).  
1
2
Auto Redial  
Select <Send/Receive Settings> with [ ] or [ ],  
and then press [OK].  
Automatic redialing enables the machine to automatically  
redial the recipient's fax number if the recipient cannot be  
reached due to a busy line, or if a sending error occurs.  
You can set the number of times and the intervals for redialing.  
Menu  
Common Settings  
Copy Settings  
Memory Media Settin...  
Send/Receive Setting  
How to display the settings  
[
] → <Send/Receive Settings> → <Fax Settings> → <Send  
Settings> → <Auto Redial>  
Settings  
(Boldface: Default settings)  
Select <Fax Settings> with [ ] or [ ], and then  
press [OK].  
3
4
5
Does not redial automatically.  
When redialing manually, see "Redialing  
(Manual Redialing)" (→P.6-6).  
Off  
Send/Receive Settings  
Common Settings  
Fax Settings  
Redial Times:  
1 to 2 to15 (times)  
Specifies the number of times for  
redialing.  
Redial Interval:  
On  
Specifies the interval for redialing.  
2 to 99 (minutes)  
Redial If Error Occurs:  
Off, On  
Specifies whether or not to redial when a  
sending error occurs.  
Select <Receive Settings> with [ ] or [ ], and  
then press [OK].  
Check Dial Tone Before Sending  
Fax Settings  
When sending a fax, you can specify whether or not to dial  
after checking the dial tone.  
Basic Settings  
Send Settings  
Receive Settings  
Fax Setup Guide  
How to display the settings  
[
] → <Send/Receive Settings> → <Fax Settings> → <Send  
Settings> → <Check Dial Tone Before Sending>  
Settings  
(Boldface: Default settings)  
Select <ECM Receiving> with [ ] or [ ], and  
then press [OK].  
Off  
Does not check the dial tone.  
Receive Settings  
ECM Receiving  
Incoming Ring  
On  
Dials after checking the dial tone.  
Remote Receiving  
Manual/Auto Switch  
6-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Settings  
(Boldface: Default settings)  
Select <Off> or <On> with [ ] or [ ], and then  
press [OK].  
6
7
Off  
Does not reduce the image size.  
ECM Receiving  
Off  
On  
<Auto>: Reduces the image size by  
Reduction Mode:  
Auto, Preset  
automatically adjusting the reduction ratio.  
<Preset>: Reduces the image size at a ratio  
specified in <Reduction Ratio>.  
Reduction Ratio:  
On  
Specify a reduction ratio for when  
<Reduction Mode> is set to <Preset>.  
97%, 95%, 90%, 75%  
* When <Apply> appears in the screen, you need to select <Apply>  
and press [OK] after specifying the setting.  
<Vertical/Horizontal>: Reduces the image  
size in vertical/horizontal direction.  
<Vertical>: Reduces the image size only in  
vertical direction.  
Reduction Direction:  
Vertical/Horizontal,  
Vertical  
Press [  
] (Menu) to close the menu screen.  
The setting is complete.  
Received Page Footer  
Setting Items for the Receive Settings  
You can specify whether to print a received date, day of the  
week, time, number, and page number at the bottom of  
documents when printing received documents.  
The receive settings include the following items.  
Send/Receive Settings  
How to display the settings  
"2-Sided Printing (MF8350Cdn Only)" (→  
P.6-24)  
[
] → <Send/Receive Settings> → <Common Settings> →  
<Receive Settings> → <Received Page Footer>  
Common  
Settings  
Receive  
Settings  
"Receive Data Reduction" (→P.6-24)  
"Received Page Footer" (→P.6-24)  
"Continue Printing When Toner Is Low" (→  
P.6-24)  
Settings  
(Boldface: Default settings)  
"ECM Receiving" (→P.6-24)  
"Incoming Ring" (→P.6-25)  
"Remote Receiving" (→P.6-25)  
"Manual/Auto Switch" (→P.6-25)  
Off  
Prints the documents without the receive information.  
Prints the documents with the receive information.  
Receive  
Settings  
On  
Fax Settings  
Continue Printing When Toner Is Low  
2-Sided Printing (MF8350Cdn Only)  
You can specify whether printing of a document being  
received is continued when a toner cartridge needs to be  
replaced soon.  
You can save paper by printing received documents on both  
sides of the paper.  
IMPORTANT  
How to display the settings  
[
] → <Send/Receive Settings> → <Common Settings> →  
When <Continue Printing When Toner Is Low> is set to <On>  
The printed documents may be light or blurred. However, the data is  
erased when the documents are printed out, so you cannot print the  
same documents again.  
<Receive Settings> → <2-Sided Printing>  
Settings  
(Boldface: Default settings)  
Off  
Does not print on both sides of paper.  
Prints on both sides of paper.  
On  
How to display the settings  
[
] → <Send/Receive Settings> → <Common Settings>  
→ <Receive Settings> → <Continue Printing When Toner Is  
Low>  
Receive Data Reduction  
You can reduce the size of images on received documents to  
match loaded paper or at a specified ratio.  
Settings  
(Boldface: Default settings)  
How to display the settings  
Off  
The machine stops printing.  
The machine continues printing.  
[
] → <Send/Receive Settings> → <Common Settings> →  
On  
<Receive Settings> → <Receive Data Reduction>  
ECM Receiving  
The ECM (Error Correction Mode) is a function for detecting  
and correcting errors during fax communication. Using the  
ECM function can diminish receive errors even with a difficult  
telephone line.  
6-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Manual/Auto Switch  
NOTE- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Check the settings for the recipient's machine also  
The ECM function is available only when the setting for the machine  
and recipient's machine are enabled.  
You can configure the machine so that it starts receiving  
documents after ringing for a certain time when <Receive  
Mode> is set to <Manual>.  
Even if the ECM function is enabled  
An error may occur due to the telephone line.  
How to display the settings  
[
] → <Send/Receive Settings> → <Fax Settings> →  
When the ECM function is enabled  
It may take time to receive documents if a problem occurs with the  
telephone line.  
<Receive Settings> → <Manual/Auto Switch>  
Settings  
(Boldface: Default settings)  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
How to display the settings  
Does not receive documents  
automatically.  
Off  
[
] → <Send/Receive Settings> → <Fax Settings> →  
<Receive Settings> → <ECM Receiving>  
Starts receiving when the time  
specified in <Incoming Ring Time> has  
elapsed.  
Incoming Ring Time: 1 to 15  
to 99 (seconds)  
On  
Settings  
(Boldface: Default settings)  
Off  
Does not use the ECM function.  
Uses the ECM function.  
System settings procedure  
On  
Specify the system settings using the following procedure.  
This section describes the procedure for changing the setting  
for [Send Start Speed] as an example.  
Incoming Ring  
You can specify whether an incoming call for the external  
telephone rings when <Receive Mode> is set to <Auto> or  
<Fax/Tel>.  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Menu  
You can also specify the number of ringing times.  
How to display the settings  
[
] → <Send/Receive Settings> → <Fax Settings> →  
<Receive Settings> → <Incoming Ring>  
Settings  
(Boldface: Default settings)  
Off  
The telephone does not ring.  
The telephone rings.  
You can specify the number of ringing  
times in <Ring Times>.  
Ring Times: 1 to 2 to 99  
(times)  
On  
OK  
Remote Receiving  
Press [  
] (Menu).  
1
2
If an external telephone is connected, you can switch to the  
fax receiving mode immediately by dialing the ID number for  
fax receiving using the dial buttons of the telephone during a  
phone call.  
Select <System Settings> with [ ] or [ ], and  
then press [OK].  
How to display the settings  
Menu  
[
] → <Send/Receive Settings> → <Fax Settings> →  
Printer Settings  
Timer Settings  
Adjustment/Cleaning  
System Settings  
<Receive Settings> → <Remote Receiving>  
Settings  
(Boldface: Default settings)  
Off  
Disables the remote receiving function.  
Remote Receive ID: Enables the remote receiving function.  
Select <Communications Settings> with [ ] or  
3
On  
00 to 25 to 99  
(times)  
You can specify an ID number for fax receiving in  
<Remote Receive ID>.  
[
], and then press [OK].  
System Settings  
Device Information  
Dept. ID Management  
Network Settings  
Communications Setti  
6-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Send Start Speed  
Select <Fax Settings> with [ ] or [ ], and then  
press [OK].  
4
5
6
This function changes the send start speed, which is useful  
when there is difficulty initiating the sending of a document.  
Communication Settings  
Fax Settings  
Memory Lock Settings  
Select Country/Region  
How to display the settings  
[
] → <System Settings> → <Communications Settings>  
→ <Fax Settings> → <Send Start Speed>  
Settings  
(Boldface: Default settings)  
33600 bps, 14400 bps,  
9600 bps, 7200 bps,  
4800 bps, 2400 bps  
Select <Send Start Speed> with [ ] or [ ], and  
then press [OK].  
Fax Settings  
Send Start Speed  
Receive Start Speed  
Receive Start Speed  
This function changes the receive start speed, which is useful  
when there is difficulty initiating the receiving of a document.  
How to display the settings  
[
] → <System Settings> → <Communications Settings>  
→ <Fax Settings> → <Receive Start Speed>  
Select the send start speed with [ ] or [ ], and  
then press [OK].  
Settings  
(Boldface: Default settings)  
Send Start Speed  
33600 bps  
14400 bps  
9600 bps  
33600 bps, 14400 bps,  
9600 bps, 7200 bps,  
4800 bps, 2400 bps  
7200 bps  
Select Country/Region  
* When <Apply> appears in the screen, you need to select <Apply>  
and press [OK] after specifying the setting.  
Specify a country or region where the machine is to be used.  
IMPORTANT  
Press [  
The setting is complete.  
] (Menu) to close the menu screen.  
7
After configuration  
Restart the machine to activate the settings.  
Setting Items for the System Settings  
The system settings for sending or receiving faxes include the  
following items.  
How to display the settings  
[
] → <System Settings> → <Communications Settings>  
→ <Fax Settings> → <Select Country/Region>  
Settings  
System Settings  
"Send Start Speed" (→  
P.6-26)  
(Boldface: Default settings)  
"Receive Start Speed" (→  
P.6-26)  
UnitedStates (US), Canada (CA),  
Brazil (BR), Mexico (MX), Other  
Fax Settings  
Communications  
Settings  
"Select Country/Region"  
(→P.6-26)  
Memory Lock Settings  
"Memory Lock Settings"  
(→P.6-26)  
Received documents are normally printed immediately.  
However, you can store the documents temporarily in memory  
without printing. You can print the stored documents at any  
time. If you do not need them, you can delete them, saving  
paper to be used.  
"Address Book PIN" (→  
P.6-27)  
"Restrict New  
Destinations" (→P.6-27)  
"Allow Driver Faxing" (→  
P.6-27)  
How to display the settings  
Restrict Sending  
"Restrict Sending from  
History" (→P.6-27)  
"Fax No. Confirmation  
[
] → <System Settings> → <Communications Settings>  
→ <Memory Lock Settings>  
Re-Entry" (→P.6-27)  
"Restrict Sequential  
Broadcast" (→P.6-27)  
6-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Settings  
(Boldface: Default settings)  
Allow Driver Faxing  
You can specify whether to permit sending of faxes from  
computer using the fax driver.  
Off  
Does not use the Memory Lock mode.  
If you set a PIN, it will be necessary to enter the  
PIN whenever you want to change the Memory  
Lock mode settings, or cancel the Memory Lock  
mode.  
How to display the settings  
Memory Lock PIN:  
Seven-digit  
number  
[
] → <System Settings> → <Restrict Sending> → <Allow  
Driver Faxing>  
Settings  
(Boldface: Default settings)  
You can specify whether or not to print the  
receive results when receiving a fax.  
You need to set also "Receive Results" to <On>.  
Print Report:  
Off, On  
On  
Off  
A fax cannot be sent from the fax driver.  
A fax can be sent from the fax driver.  
If you specify <Set>, documents are received in  
Memory Lock Time: the memory only within a specified time.  
On  
Do Not Set, Set  
Enter <Memory Lock Start Time> and <Memory  
Lock End Time> respectively.  
Restrict Sending from History  
You can specify whether or not to restrict sending from a  
history.  
NOTE- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Memory Lock PIN  
How to display the settings  
•
•
•
If you do not want to set the PIN, press [OK] without entering any  
[
] → <System Settings> → <Restrict Sending> → <Restrict  
numbers.  
Sending from History>  
You cannot register consecutive digits that consist of only "0" as a  
PIN, such as <0000000>.  
If you register a number that starts from <0>, the PIN changes as  
follows.  
Settings  
(Boldface: Default settings)  
Off  
Sending from a history is permitted.  
Sending from a history is not permitted.  
Example: When you enter <02> or <002>, the PIN is specified as  
<0000002>.  
On  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Address Book PIN  
Fax No. Confirmation Re-Entry  
You can specify whether or not to display the screen for  
reentering the fax number when you are setting a send  
destination for a fax. You can confirm the destination is  
specified correctly by entering a fax number twice before  
sending a document.  
You can specify a PIN for the address book.  
When you specify a PIN, you need to enter the registered PIN  
before registering, editing, or deleting a destination.  
How to display the settings  
[
] → <System Settings> → <Restrict Sending> →  
How to display the settings  
<Address Book PIN>  
[
] → <System Settings> → <Restrict Sending> → <Fax No.  
Confirmation Re-Entry>  
Settings  
Enter a 7-digit number.  
Pressing [OK] without entering a number lifts the PIN  
restriction.  
Settings  
(Boldface: Default settings)  
Off  
Does not display the re-entry screen.  
Displays the re-entry screen.  
On  
Restrict New Destinations  
Restrict the destinations that can be specified to already-  
registered one-touch keys or coded dial codes. You cannot  
perform the following operations if you activate the restriction  
function.  
Restrict Sequential Broadcast  
You can specify the restriction when sending a fax to multiple  
recipients.  
• Specifying the destination using the numeric keys  
• Registering new destinations to the address book/one-  
touch keys/coded dial codes  
• Changing destinations which are registered in the address  
book/one-touch keys/coded dial codes  
How to display the settings  
[
] → <System Settings> → <Restrict Sending> → <Restrict  
Sequential Broadcast>  
Settings  
(Boldface: Default settings)  
How to display the settings  
[
] → <System Settings> → <Restrict Sending> → <Restrict  
Off  
Allows you to send a fax to multiple recipients.  
New Destinations>  
Confirm  
Sequential  
Broadcast  
Displays a confirmation screen when you send a fax to  
multiple recipients.  
Settings  
(Boldface: Default settings)  
Reject Sequential  
Broadcast  
Does not allow you to send a fax to multiple recipients.  
Off  
Does not perform restriction.  
Performs restriction. Specifies destinations registered under the one-  
touch keys and coded dial codes.  
On  
6-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
6-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
7
Using the Scan Functions  
The documents scanned by the machine can be stored in a computer or a USB memory.  
* If you are a Macintosh user, see the Scanner Driver Guide.  
Basic Operation Methods for Scanning  
7-2  
Scanning Documents and Saving Them in a Computer (USB &  
Network Connection)  
7-2  
7-3  
Saving Scanned Documents in a USB Memory  
7-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Operation Methods for Scanning  
• If eleven or more computers are connected via a network  
The eleventh and subsequent computers are not displayed (you  
cannot scan).  
Scanning Documents and Saving Them in a  
Computer (USB & Network Connection)  
Reduce the number of computers connected to this machine  
via a network.  
You can scan a document using the keys on the operation  
panel.  
e-Manual → Scan → Scanning Documents and Saving  
Them in a Computer (USB & Network Connection) →  
Registering the Scanner in MF Network Scan Utility (Network  
Connection Only)  
NOTE- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
To scan documents by operating a computer  
See "Scan" in the e-Manual.  
* You can change the names for the displayed computers.  
e-Manual → Scan → Scanning Documents and Saving Them  
in a Computer (USB & Network Connection) → Using the MF  
Toolbox  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Keys to be used for this operation  
SCAN  
Specify destination.  
EXAMPLE1  
EXAMPLE2  
Specify the scanner settings (any of <Scan-1> to  
5
<Scan-4>) with [  
[OK].  
] or [  
], and then press  
The scanner settings are specified by default as follows.  
OK  
Scan Mode Resolution File Type  
PDF Settings  
Searchable/  
High  
Scan-1  
Scan-2  
Scan-3  
Color  
Color  
300 dpi  
300 dpi  
300 dpi  
PDF  
JPEG  
TIFF  
Place documents on the platen glass or load them  
in the feeder.  
1
-
-
"Placing Documents" (→P.2-4)  
"Documents Requirements" (→P.2-2)  
Black and  
White  
Searchable/  
Standard  
NOTE- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Scanning from the platen glass  
You cannot scan multiple documents from the platen glass.  
Scan-4  
Color  
300 dpi  
PDF  
Specify destination.  
Scan: Press OK  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Color:Scan-1 Compa  
Color:Scan-2 JPEG  
B&W:Scan-3 TIFF  
Press [  
].  
2
3
Select <Computer> with [  
press [OK].  
] or [  
], and then  
Scanning operation starts, and the scan mode screen reappears  
after saving the data.  
Select the scan type.  
Computer  
Remote Scanner  
Memory Media  
NOTE- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
About <Fax (New)>  
Select <Fax (New)> in the above screen, and then press [OK]. The fax  
sending screen appears. (This is the same state as where [FAX] on the  
operation panel is pressed.)  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Specify a destination with [  
then press [OK].  
] or [  
], and  
4
• When multiple computers are connected  
The computer connected by a USB cable is listed on the top.  
• When a computer is connected by a USB cable  
This screen is not displayed.  
7-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Keys to be used for this operation  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
?
ꢀ
SCAN  
If you cannot scan  
You cannot scan when the setting screen of the MF Toolbox is  
displayed.  
Click [  
] to close the setting screen before scanning.  
OK  
Start  
Connect the USB memory to the USB memory  
port.  
When the USB memory is connected, the access indicator turns  
on. When the access indicator is blinking, the memory media is  
being read or in other processes. Do not touch the USB memory  
and the surroundings of the USB memory port.  
1
2
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
The location to save the scanned images  
The folder where the images are saved opens automatically  
after scanning.  
By default, the folder for the date when you scanned  
the data is created in the [My Pictures] folder in [My  
Documents]. (For Windows Vista/7, the folder is created in  
the [Pictures] folder.)  
NOTE- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
To change the scanner settings  
You can change the settings for the location to save, the file format,  
or the resolution from a computer. For more details, see "Scan" in the  
e-Manual.  
Place documents on the platen glass or load them  
in the feeder.  
"Placing Documents" (→P.2-4)  
"Documents Requirements" (→P.2-2)  
NOTE- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Scanning from the platen glass  
You cannot scan multiple documents from the platen glass.  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Press [  
].  
3
4
Select <Memory Media> with [  
then press [OK].  
] or [  
], and  
Select the scan type.  
Computer  
Remote Scanner  
Memory Media  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Saving Scanned Documents in a USB Memory  
NOTE- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
About <Fax (New)>  
You can save scanned documents in a USB memory connected  
to the machine.  
Select <Fax (New)> in the above screen, and then press [OK]. The fax  
sending screen appears. (This is the same state as where [FAX] on the  
operation panel is pressed.)  
NOTE- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Available USB memory and the file type of data  
Connect the USB memory formatted in FAT to the machine directly.  
Only PDF is supported as the file type to save. For more details, see  
"Scan" in the e-Manual.  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When removing a USB memory  
Specify the scan settings depending on the types  
of documents or use.  
The following settings can be changed.  
For details on each item, see "Scan" in the e-Manual.  
• Scanning size  
• Density  
• Original orientation  
• Original type  
• Sharpness  
• Data Size (Color Only)  
The settings specified here are effective only for the current  
operation.  
To make the settings effective for all the transmitting operations to  
a USB memory, see "Scan" in the e-Manual.  
5
6
(1) Press [  
] (Status Monitor/Cancel).  
(2) Select <Device Status> with [  
press [OK].  
] or [  
], and then  
Status Monitor/Cancel  
Device Status  
Copy Job Status  
Fax Job Status/Hist...  
Print Job Status/Hi...  
Press [  
] (Color) or [  
] (B&W).  
Press [ ] (Color).  
Press [ ] (B&W).  
For Color Scan  
(3) Select <Remove Memory Media> with [  
and then press [OK].  
] or [  
],  
For Black and White Scan  
Device Status  
Paper Information  
Toner Gauge  
Remove Memory Media  
Check Counter  
(4) Remove the USB memory.  
Scanning operation starts. The scanned data is sent to the USB  
memory when scanning is complete.  
(5) Press [  
] (Status Monitor/Cancel) to close the screen.  
Names of the folders and files where data is saved  
Folder name  
The "SCAN_00" folder is created in the uppermost hierarchy  
(root directory) in the USB memory, and the file is saved in  
this folder.  
When the "SCAN_00" folder is full, the "SCAN_01" folder is  
created, and folders (up to "SCAN_99") will be created in  
order.  
File name  
A file name between "SCAN0000.PDF" and "SCAN9999.PDF"  
is provided.  
The two-digit number of the folder is provided in the fifth  
and sixth characters from the left.  
Up to 100 files can be saved in a folder.  
7-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
8
Maintenance  
This section describes the maintenance of this machine, replacement of the toner cartridges, and so  
on.  
Cleaning the Machine  
8-2  
Cleaning the Exterior  
8-2  
8-2  
8-3  
8-3  
8-4  
Cleaning the Fixing Unit  
Cleaning the ITB  
Cleaning the Platen Glass  
Cleaning the Feeder Automatically  
8-5  
Replacing Toner Cartridges  
About the Supplied Toner Cartridge  
About Replacement Toner Cartridges  
Handling Toner Cartridges  
8-5  
8-5  
8-6  
8-6  
8-7  
8-7  
8-8  
Checking the Toner Level  
When a Message Appears  
Replacing Toner Cartridges  
Precautions when Replacing Toner Cartridges  
Purchase Consumables  
8-9  
Recycling Used Cartridges  
8-10  
The Clean Earth Campaign  
U.S.A. PROGRAM  
Packaging  
8-10  
8-10  
8-10  
8-11  
Shipping  
CANADA PROGRAM-CANADA PROGRAMME  
8-12  
Transporting the Machine  
8-13  
Precautions when Transporting the Machine  
8-14  
8-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cleaning the Machine  
Before cleaning the machine, check the following.  
• Make sure that no jobs are stored in memory, then turn OFF  
the main power switch and disconnect the power cord.  
• Use a soft cloth to avoid scratching the machine.  
• Do not use tissue paper, paper towels, or similar materials  
for cleaning. They can stick to the components or generate  
static charges.  
Cleaning the Fixing Unit  
In the following cases, the fixing unit may be dirty. Clean the  
fixing unit.  
• When black streaks appear on the printed paper  
• When a toner cartridge is replaced  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Menu  
CAUTION  
Never use volatile liquids such as thinner, benzene, acetone, or any  
other chemical cleaner to clean the machine. These can damage the  
machine components.  
NOTE- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Sending or receiving faxes  
When the power plug is unplugged, the machine cannot send or  
receive faxes.  
When there is data that is waiting for printing  
The data is deleted when you turn OFF the main power switch.  
OK  
Data received in memory, reserve sending data, etc.  
They can be kept for approximately 5 minutes after the power plug is  
unplugged. To check jobs stored in memory, see the following.  
"Checking/Handling Fax Documents in Memory" (→P.6-17)  
Press [  
] (Menu).  
1
2
Press [ ] or [ ] to select <Adjustment/  
Cleaning>, and then press [OK].  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Menu  
Cleaning the Exterior  
Send/Receive Settin...  
Printer Settings  
Timer Settings  
Adjustment/Cleaning  
Clean the exterior of the machine and ventilation slots.  
Turn OFF the main power switch and disconnect  
1
the power cord.  
Clean the exterior of the machine with a soft, well  
wrung out cloth dampened with water or mild  
detergent diluted with water.  
2
Press [ ] or [ ] to select <Clean Fixing Unit>,  
and then press [OK].  
3
4
Adjustment/Cleaning  
Correct Print Color...  
Black Text Processi...  
Special Processing  
Clean Fixing Unit  
Make sure that paper is loaded, and then press  
[OK].  
Load the paper indicated in the display.  
Cleaning starts. It takes approx. 68 seconds for MF8350Cdn and  
approx. 74 seconds for MF8050Cn.  
When the printer is completely dry, connect the  
power cord, and then turn ON the power.  
3
Clean Fixing Unit  
Load A4 or LTR paper.  
Start  
*
It is recommended that you use plain paper to clean the fixing  
unit.  
8-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Press [  
] (Menu) to close the menu screen.  
5
If cleaning does not start  
When there are jobs stored in the memory, this function is not  
available.  
Cleaning the Platen Glass  
Follow this procedure to clean the platen glass and under  
surface of the feeder.  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Press [  
] (Menu) to close the menu screen.  
5
WARNING  
Cleaning the ITB  
When cleaning the outside of the machine  
Turn OFF the main power switch and disconnect the power cord from  
the AC power outlet. Failure to do so can result in a fire or electrical  
shock.  
If dirt sticks to the transfer belt and results in a deterioration in  
print quality, clean the transfer belt inside the machine.  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Menu  
CAUTION  
When closing the feeder  
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.  
Open the feeder.  
1
OK  
Press [  
] (Menu).  
1
2
Press [ ] or [ ] to select <Adjustment/  
Cleaning>, and then press [OK].  
Menu  
Clean the platen glass and the under surface of  
the feeder.  
(1) Clean the areas with a cloth dampened with water.  
(2) Wipe the areas with a soft, dry cloth.  
2
Send/Receive Settin...  
Printer Settings  
Timer Settings  
Adjustment/Cleaning  
Press [ ] or [ ] to select <Clean ITB>, and then  
press [OK].  
3
4
Adjustment/Cleaning  
Black Text Processi...  
Special Processing  
Clean Fixing Unit  
Clean ITB  
Close the feeder.  
3
Press [OK].  
Cleaning starts. It takes approx. 51 seconds for MF8350Cdn and  
approx. 83 seconds for MF8050Cn.  
Clean ITB  
Start  
8-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cleaning the Feeder Automatically  
Load 10 sheets of A4 or Letter size plain paper in  
the feeder, and then press [OK].  
4
If copies have streaks or if the original documents are dirtied  
after using the feeder, this may be caused by pencil lead  
rubbing off the documents and onto the roller. Clean the roller  
using blank paper.  
Cleaning starts. It takes approximately 65 seconds.  
Clean Feeder  
Load 10 sheets of A4  
or LTR in feeder.  
Start  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Menu  
OK  
Press [  
] (Menu) to close the menu screen.  
5
Press [  
] (Menu).  
1
2
Press [ ] or [ ] to select <Adjustment/  
Cleaning>, and then press [OK].  
Menu  
Send/Receive Settin...  
Printer Settings  
Timer Settings  
Adjustment/Cleaning  
Press [ ] or [ ] to select <Clean Feeder>, and  
then press [OK].  
3
Adjustment/Cleaning  
Special Processing  
Clean Fixing Unit  
Clean ITB  
Clean Feeder  
8-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
This section describes the procedure for replacing toner  
cartridges.  
Replacing Toner Cartridges  
* "ISO/IEC 19798" is the global standard related to "Method for the  
determination of toner cartridge yield for color printers and multi-  
function devices that contain printer components" issued by ISO  
(International Organization for Standardization).  
• About the Supplied Toner Cartridge  
• About Replacement Toner Cartridges  
• Handling Toner Cartridges  
*2  
• Checking the Toner Level  
The life of the toner cartridges is affected by the following conditions.  
Printing  
environment/  
conditions  
* The yields of the toner cartridges included in this machine  
differ from those of replacement toner cartridges.  
Spaced printing  
Paper size and paper type settings  
Printing ratio  
Toner is used even when printing with a low printing ratio.  
About the Supplied Toner Cartridge  
Multiple color toner cartridges may reach the end of their  
life at the same time.  
Color printing  
The average yield of the included toner cartridges is as follows.  
The machine  
configuration  
Black and white printing may affect the life of the color  
toner cartridges.  
•
•
Average yield of K (Black) toner cartridge*1*2: 1,200 sheets  
Average yield of Composite C (Cyan), M (Magenta), andY (Yellow)  
toner cartridges*1*2: 1,400 sheets  
Average yield of K (Black) toner cartridge*1*2: 800 sheets  
Average yield of Composite C (Cyan), M (Magenta), andY (Yellow)  
toner cartridges*1*2: 800 sheets  
MF8350Cdn  
MF8050Cn  
•
•
IMPORTANT  
About Replacement Toner Cartridges  
For optimum print quality, replacing the toner cartridges with Canon  
genuine ones is recommended.  
*1  
The average yield is on the basis of "ISO/IEC 19798"* when printing A4 size paper  
with the default print density setting.  
* "ISO/IEC 19798" is the global standard related to "Method for the  
determination of toner cartridge yield for color printers and multi-  
function devices that contain printer components" issued by ISO  
(International Organization for Standardization).  
Model name  
Supported Canon genuine toner cartridge  
Canon Cartridge 118Yellow  
Canon Cartridge 118 Magenta  
Canon Cartridge 118 Cyan  
Canon Cartridge 118 Black  
*2  
MF8350Cdn  
The life of the toner cartridges is affected by the following conditions.  
Printing  
environment/  
conditions  
Spaced printing  
Paper size and paper type settings  
Canon Cartridge 116Yellow  
Canon Cartridge 116 Magenta  
Canon Cartridge 116 Cyan  
Canon Cartridge 116 Black  
MF8050Cn  
Printing ratio  
Toner is used even when printing with a low printing ratio.  
Multiple color toner cartridges may reach the end of their  
life at the same time.  
Color printing  
The machine  
configuration  
Black and white printing may affect the life of the color  
toner cartridges.  
About Replacement Toner Cartridges  
Purchase the toner cartridges at your local authorized Canon  
dealer.  
Replace the toner cartridges according to the description in  
the following charts. However, you may need to replace the  
toner cartridge earlier than the described life time depending  
on installation environment of the machine, the printing paper  
size, or the document type.  
MF8350Cdn  
Toner cartridges  
Target for replacing toner cartridges  
Average yield of K (Black) toner cartridge *1*2 : 3,400  
sheets  
Canon Cartridge 118 Black  
Canon Cartridge 118Yellow  
Canon Cartridge 118 Magenta  
Canon Cartridge 118 Cyan  
Average yield of CompositeY (Yellow), M (Magenta),  
and C (Cyan) toner cartridges *1*2 : 2,900 sheets  
MF8050Cn  
Toner cartridges  
Target for replacing toner cartridges  
Average yield of K (Black) toner cartridge *1*2 : 2,300  
sheets  
Canon Cartridge 116 Black  
Canon Cartridge 116Yellow  
Canon Cartridge 116 Magenta  
Canon Cartridge 116 Cyan  
Average yield of CompositeY (Yellow), M (Magenta),  
and C (Cyan) toner cartridges *1*2 : 1,500 sheets  
*1  
The average yield is on the basis of "ISO/IEC 19798"* when printing A4 size paper  
with the default print density setting.  
8-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Handling Toner Cartridges  
Checking the Toner Level  
Note the following when handling the toner cartridge.  
Keys to be used for this operation  
CAUTION  
Reset  
Toner Gauge  
Do not place the toner cartridge in fire.  
This may cause toner remaining inside the cartridge to ignite and  
result in burns.  
If toner leaks from the toner cartridge  
Be careful not to inhale the toner or allow it to come into direct  
contact with your skin. If the toner comes into contact with your skin,  
wash with soap. If the skin becomes irritated or you inhale the toner,  
consult a physician immediately.  
When removing a toner cartridge  
Make sure to remove it carefully. If not removed with care, the toner  
powder may scatter and come in contact with your eyes and mouth. If  
toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold  
water and consult a physician.  
Press [  
The toner level is displayed.  
] (Toner Gauge).  
1
Keep the toner cartridge away from small children.  
If the toner or other parts are ingested, consult a physician  
immediately.  
NOTE- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Displaying the toner level  
The toner level is displayed in three stages.  
Do not disassemble the toner cartridge  
The toner may scatter and get into your eyes or mouth. If toner gets  
into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and  
consult a physician.  
•
•
<OK>  
<Low>  
The message <Prepare <Toner Color>* toner cartridge.> appears in  
the display.  
•
<Empty>  
The message <Replace <Toner Color>* toner cartridge.> appears in  
the display.  
IMPORTANT  
Handling toner cartridges  
* Black, yellow, magenta, or cyan will appear in <Toner Color>.  
(More than one color may appear.)  
For details on the solution, see "Troubleshooting" in the  
e-Manual.  
•
Keep the toner cartridge away from computer screens, disk drives,  
and floppy disks. They may be damaged by magnet which is in  
inside of the toner cartridge.  
*
Even if <OK> or <Low> is displayed, the message <Check <Toner  
Color>* toner cartridge.> may appear in the display.  
•
•
•
•
•
Avoid locations subject to high temperature, high humidity, or  
rapid changes in temperature.  
Do not expose the toner cartridge to direct sunlight or bright light  
for more than five minutes.  
Store the toner cartridge in its protective bag. Do not open the bag  
until you are ready to install the toner cartridge in the machine.  
Keep the protective bag for the toner cartridge. They are required  
when transporting the machine such as during relocation.  
Do not store the toner cartridge in a salty atmosphere or where  
there are corrosive gases such as from aerosol sprays.  
Do not remove the toner cartridge from the machine unnecessarily.  
Print quality may deteriorate if the drum surface is exposed to light  
or is damaged.  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Press [ ] (Reset) to return to standby mode.  
2
•
•
•
•
Always hold the toner cartridge by its handle to avoid touching the  
drum.  
Do not place the toner cartridge in an upright or an upside down  
position. If the toner is kept upright or upside down, the toner  
will solidify and may not return to its original condition even if it is  
shaken.  
•
When disposing of a used toner cartridge, place the toner container  
into its protective bag to prevent the toner from scattering, and  
then dispose of the toner cartridge according to local regulations.  
Be careful of counterfeit toner cartridges  
Please be aware that there are counterfeit Canon toner cartridges in  
the marketplace.  
Use of counterfeit toner cartridges may result in poor print quality or  
machine performance.  
Canon is not responsible for any malfunction, accident or damage  
caused by the use of counterfeit toner cartridge.  
For more information, see http://www.canon.com/counterfeit.  
8-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
When a Message Appears  
Press the lever and pull out the toner cartridge  
tray.  
2
Toner cartridges are consumable products. When the toner has  
almost or completely run out in the middle of operating this  
machine, a message appears in the display.  
ꢀ MF8350Cdn  
Message  
When it is displayed  
Description and solutions  
(1)  
Have ready a replacement  
toner cartridge.  
When a toner cartridge soon It is recommended that you  
Prepare <Toner  
Color>* toner  
cartridge.  
needs to be replaced.  
replace the toner cartridge  
before printing a large amount  
of data.  
Toner cartridges with print  
quality that cannot be  
(2)  
Continuing to use these  
cartridges may cause a  
malfunction, so replacing  
these cartridges with new  
cartridges is recommended.  
Check <Toner  
Color>* toner  
cartridge.  
guaranteed due to their  
decreasing lifetime etc., or  
used toner cartridges that  
have reached their lifetime,  
may have been inserted.  
ꢀ MF8050Cn  
(1)  
Replace the toner cartridge  
with a new one.  
When a toner cartridge has  
reached the end of its life.  
When a toner cartridge is  
damaged.  
Replace <Toner  
Color>* toner  
cartridge.  
However, when the cyan,  
magenta, or yellow toner runs  
out, you can perform only  
black and white printing.  
* Black, yellow, magenta, or cyan will appear in <Toner Color>.  
(2)  
Replacing Toner Cartridges  
Before replacing toner cartridges, see "Precautions when  
Replacing Toner Cartridges" (→P.8-8)  
Hold the toner cartridge to be replaced by its  
handle and pull it straight up and out of the  
machine.  
3
4
If the message prompting replacement of toner appears,  
replace the toner cartridge.  
NOTE- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Checking the toner cartridge status for each color  
You can check the status of the toner cartridges for each color on the  
operation panel.  
"Checking the Toner Level" (→P.8-6)  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Open the front cover.  
1
Take out the new toner cartridge from the  
protective bag.  
You can open the protective bag with your hands from the notch.  
8-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Shake the toner cartridge 5 or 6 times as shown in  
the figure to evenly distribute the toner inside the  
cartridge.  
Install the toner cartridge.  
Be careful not to let the drum impact the frame of the toner  
cartridge tray.  
5
9
Do not remove the drum protective cover (A).  
(A)  
Front View  
Place the toner cartridge on a flat surface.  
6
7
Remove the tab, and the pull out the sealing  
tapes.  
Push the toner cartridge tray back in.  
Close the front cover.  
10  
11  
Pull out the sealing tape (approx. 50 cm long) gently.  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
If you cannot close the front cover  
Make sure that the toner cartridge tray is closed.  
Do not try to forcefully close the front cover, as this may damage the  
machine.  
(1)  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Precautions when Replacing Toner Cartridges  
(2)  
See "Maintenance and Inspections" (→P.viii) in  
"Important Safety Instructions" as well.  
Remove the drum protective cover (A).  
8
WARNING  
Do not dispose of a used toner cartridge in open  
flames  
This may cause the toner remaining inside the cartridges to ignite,  
resulting in burns or fire.  
(A)  
CAUTION  
Precautions if you get toner on your hands or  
clothing  
If toner gets on your hands or clothing, wash them immediately with  
cold water.  
Washing with warm water sets the toner, making it impossible to  
remove the toner stains.  
Be careful not to allow the toner to scatter  
Do not pull out the sealing tape forcefully or stop at midpoint, as this  
may cause toner to spill out.  
If toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with  
cold water and consult a physician.  
Precautions when closing the front cover  
Be careful not to catch your fingers.  
8-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
•
If any tape remains in the toner cartridge, this may result in poor  
print quality.  
IMPORTANT  
About replacement toner cartridges  
For optimum print quality, replacement is recommended using  
genuine Canon toner cartridges.  
Disposing of the removed sealing tape  
Dispose of the sealing tape according to local regulations.  
Keep the protective bag and drum protective cover  
Keep the protective bag for the toner cartridge and the removed  
drum protective cover. You will need them when you remove the  
toner cartridge for machine maintenance or other purposes.  
Model name  
Supported Canon genuine toner cartridge  
MF8350Cdn  
Canon Cartridge 118 Yellow  
Canon Cartridge 118 Magenta  
Canon Cartridge 118 Cyan  
Canon Cartridge 118 Black  
Do not touch the high-voltage contacts (A)  
This may result in damage to the machine.  
MF8050Cn  
Canon Cartridge 116 Yellow  
Canon Cartridge 116 Magenta  
Canon Cartridge 116 Cyan  
Canon Cartridge 116 Black  
(A)  
(A)  
Shake the toner cartridge before setting  
If toner is not distributed evenly, this may result in a deterioration in  
print quality.  
Precautions when installing toner cartridges  
The position of the toner cartridges in the machine is determined by  
the toner color. Install the toner cartridges in the slots that have labels  
of the same color.  
Hold the toner cartridges properly  
When handling the toner cartridges, hold them properly as shown in  
the figure. Do not place them vertically or upside-down.  
Do not touch the toner cartridge memory (A) or the  
electrical contacts (B)  
Do not leave the front cover open for a long time with the  
toner cartridges installed.  
This may result in damage to the cartridge.  
This may result in a deterioration in print quality.  
(A)  
(A)  
After replacing toner cartridges  
To maintain image quality, it is recommended to perform automatic  
gradation adjustment.  
(B)  
(B)  
e-Manual → Maintenance → Adjusting → Correcting the  
Gradation → Making Full Adjustment  
Do not touch the drum (A).  
Print quality may deteriorate if you touch or damage the drum (A) at  
the bottom of the toner cartridge.  
NOTE- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
About the packing materials  
The packing materials may be changed in form or placement, or may  
be added or removed without notice.  
When the message <Replace toner cartridge.> appears  
when receiving a fax  
Printing of the fax is interrupted and the received data will be stored  
(A)  
in the memory.  
Bottom View  
If <Continue Printing When Toner Is Low> is set to <On>  
You can keep printing fax documents or reports without replacing  
a toner cartridge. However, the printed documents may be light  
or blurred because of lack of toner. The data is erased when the  
documents are printed out, so you cannot print the same documents  
again. "Continue Printing When Toner Is Low" (→P.6-24)  
When pulling out the sealing tape  
•
Do not pull the sealing tape diagonally or sideways. If the tape  
breaks, this may become difficult to pull out completely.  
Collecting used toner cartridges  
"Recycling Used Cartridges" (→P.8-10)  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Purchase Consumables  
Top View  
•
Even if the sealing tape stops at midpoint, pull it out of the toner  
cartridge completely.  
Purchase at your local authorized Canon dealer.  
If you are not sure, contact the Canon help line.  
8-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Recycling Used Cartridges  
Canon has instituted a worldwide recycling program for cartridges called "The Clean Earth Campaign". This program  
preserves precious natural resources by utilizing a variety of materials found in the used cartridges  
that are of no further use, to remanufacture new cartridges which, at the same time, keeps the environment cleaner by  
reducing landfill waste.  
Complete details concerning this program are enclosed in each Cartridge box.  
The Clean Earth Campaign  
ꢀ THE Canon CARTRIDGE RECYCLING PROGRAM  
The Canon Cartridge Recycling Program fulfills the first initiative of Canon's Clean Earth Campaign, which  
supports four critical environmental areas:  
• Recycling in the Workplace  
• Conserving Environmental Resources  
• Scientific Research and Education  
• Encouraging Outdoors Appreciation  
The remaining "Clean Earth" initiatives are supported in the U.S. through sponsorships of the National Park Foundation, the National  
Wildlife Federation, and The Nature Conservancy and in Canada through donations to the World Wildlife Fund Canada and The  
Nature Conservancy of Canada.  
Since its inception, The Canon Cartridge Recycling Program has collected huge amount of cartridges that otherwise would have  
been discarded into landfills or similar facilities.  
Instead, this rapidly growing program returns used cartridges to the manufacturing process, thus conserving an array of resources.  
Becoming a part of this worthwhile program is easy. When your cartridge is of no further use, simply follow the instructions detailed  
for U.S. or Canadian residents.  
We appreciate your support of The Canon Cartridge Recycling Program.  
Working together we can make a significant contribution to a cleaner planet.  
• Cartridges collected through this program are not refilled.  
• You are not entitled to a tax deduction or rebate for the return of empty cartridges.  
• This program may be modified or discontinued without notice.  
U.S.A. PROGRAM  
Packaging  
ꢀ Option A-1: Single Box Return  
• Repackage the empty cartridge utilizing the wrapper and pulp mould end-blocks from the new cartridge's box.  
• Place the empty cartridge in the box of your new cartridge. Seal the box.  
8-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
ꢀ Option B: Volume Box Return  
We encourage you to use this option as a more efficient way to ship cartridges.  
• Place as many cartridges as possible into one box.  
Carefully seal the box with tape;  
or  
• Call 1-800-OK-Canon to receive your free eight cartridge collection box.  
ꢀ Option A-2: Multiple Box Return  
We encourage you to use this option as a more efficient way to ship cartridges.  
• Complete Option A-1.  
• Bundle multiple cartridge boxes together securely with tape.  
Please be sure that the shipment does not exceed UPS specifications.  
Maximum weight = 70 lb. (31.8 kg)  
Maximum length = 108" (2,743 mm)  
Maximum girth (length + 2 x width + 2 x height) = 130" (3,302 mm)  
If your shipment exceeds the above limits, please call 1-800-OK-Canon for special shipping information.  
Please Note:  
Do not send defective cartridges for replacement.  
Defective cartridges under warranty should be exchanged by an authorized dealer or service facility as provided in  
the warranty.  
Shipping  
Apply the UPS authorized returning label provided in this guide.  
Residents of Alaska and Hawaii: Do not use the UPS authorized returning label. For Alaska and Hawaii Canon set up alternative  
mail service with the U.S. Postal Service.  
Please call 1-800-OK-Canon to receive U.S. Postal Service merchandise returning label.  
• Give the shipment to your UPS driver when you receive your next regular delivery; (UPS may charge a fee for customers who call  
UPS to pick up a cartridge shipment if they do not already have a delivery scheduled.)  
or  
• Take the shipment to your local UPS receiving point.  
8-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CANADA PROGRAM-CANADA PROGRAMME  
ꢀ Option A: Single Box Return  
• Repackage the empty cartridge utilizing the wrapper and pulp mould end-blocks from the new cartridge's box.  
• Place the empty cartridge in the box of your new cartridge. Seal the box.  
• Apply the Canon Canada Inc./Canada Post label provided in this brochure. Canon's labels are specially marked so that Canon  
pays the postage.  
• Deposit your empty cartridge in any full size street mailbox or take it to your local Canada Post outlet or franchise.  
ꢀ Option B: Volume Box Return (eight or more cartridges)  
We encourage you to use this option as a more efficient way to ship cartridges.  
• Call 1-800-667-2666 to receive your free Canon collection box kit.  
• The collection box can accommodate eight individual cartridge boxes.  
• Place your eight individually packaged boxes of empty cartridges into the Canon collection box. Seal the box.  
• Apply the Canon Canada Inc./Canada Post label provided in this brochure.  
• Canon's labels are specially marked so that Canon pays the postage.  
• Deliver to any local Canada Post outlet or franchise. Customers who hold a Commercial pick-up agreement with Canada Post  
may have their collection box picked up.  
Working to preserve endangered species is a long-standing Canon interest.  
To this end, for every cartridge collected, Canon Canada donates $1, shared equally between World Wildlife Fund Canada and the  
Nature Conservancy of Canada. This donation is utilized in Canada.  
• For further information about The Clean Earth Campaign in Canada, please call or write to Canon.  
1-800-667-2666  
Canon Canada Inc.  
Corporate Customer Relations  
6390 Dixie Road  
Mississauga, ON L5T 1P7  
8-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Transporting the Machine  
Pull out the paper cassette.  
Hold the paper cassette with both hands.  
3
4
Before transporting the machine, see "Precautions when  
Transporting the Machine" (→P.8-14)  
When changing the location of the machine or moving the  
machine for maintenance, be sure to perform the following  
procedure.  
Turn the power OFF, then disconnect the cables  
and cord from the machine.  
1
ꢀ MF8350Cdn  
(3)  
(4)  
Move the machine from the installation site.  
(2)  
Hold the grips with two or more people.  
Check the weight of the machine so it can be carried safely.  
"Main Specifications" (→P.11-2)  
(5)  
(1)  
ꢀ MF8350Cdn  
(6)  
ꢀ MF8050Cn  
(3)  
(4)  
(2)  
(5)  
(6)  
(1)  
How to remove the cables and cord  
USB cable*  
(2) Turn the computer off.  
(3) Remove it from the machine.  
LAN cable*  
Power cord  
(4) Remove it from the machine.  
(5) Unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet.  
(6) Remove it from the machine.  
* Whether the cable is connected or not varies depending on your  
environment.  
If telephone cables are connected, disconnect all  
the telephone cables from the machine.  
2
8-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
ꢀ MF8050Cn  
Precautions when Transporting the Machine  
WARNING  
When transporting the machine  
Be sure to turn off the power switches of the machine and your  
computer, and then unplug the power plug and interface cables.  
Failure to do so can damage the cables or cords, resulting in a fire or  
electrical shock.  
CAUTION  
Do not carry the machine with the paper cassette  
installed  
If you do so, the paper cassette may drop, resulting in personal injury.  
Do not carry the machine with the optional paper  
cassette (Cassette 2) installed  
If you do so, the optional paper cassette (Cassette 2) may drop  
resulting in personal injury  
Put the machine down carefully at the new  
installation site.  
5
6
Insert the paper cassette into the machine.  
Push it into the machine firmly.  
Connect a LAN cable to the machine as needed.  
7
8
Connect telephone cables to the machine as  
needed.  
Connect the power cord.  
9
Put the machine down slowly and carefully  
Be careful not to hurt your hands or fingers.  
Plug the power plug into the AC power outlet.  
Connect a USB cable to the machine as needed.  
10  
11  
IMPORTANT  
When transporting the machine long distance  
To prevent damage to the machine during transport,  
perform the following.  
Do not carry the machine with the cover or tray open  
Make sure that the front cover and multi-purpose tray are closed  
before carrying the machine.  
• Remove the toner cartridges  
• Securely pack the printer in the original box with packing  
materials  
* If the original box and packing materials are not available,  
find an appropriate box along with packing materials and  
pack the machine and the parts appropriately.  
8-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter  
9
Troubleshooting  
This section describes solutions for cases such as paper jam and when problems are not solved.  
Clearing Jams  
9-2  
Document Jams in the Feeder  
9-2  
9-3  
9-4  
9-5  
Paper Jams in the Paper Cassette (Cassette 1 or 2)  
Paper Jams in the Multi-purpose Tray (MF8350Cdn Only)  
Paper Jams in the Manual Feed Slot (MF8050Cn Only)  
Paper Jams in the Rear Cover or Duplex Unit (MF8350Cdn Only) 9-6  
Paper Jams in the Output Area (MF8350Cdn Only) 9-7  
Paper Jams in the Output Area and Rear Cover (MF8050Cn Only) 9-8  
Display Messages  
9-9  
9-9  
Error Code  
If <Incorrect size/setting> Appears  
9-11  
9-12  
Troubleshooting  
Check the Following First  
9-12  
9-12  
9-12  
9-12  
9-12  
9-13  
9-13  
Is the power switch turned ON?  
Has the power switch been just turned ON?  
Is the machine in Sleep mode?  
Is the Error indicator on or blinking?  
Is a message displayed on the display?  
Is the telephone line connected or configured properly?  
If You Cannot Solve a Problem  
9-13  
If a Power Failure Occurs  
9-14  
If You Cannot Solve a Problem  
9-15  
Customer Support (U.S.A.)  
Customer Support (Canada)  
9-15  
9-16  
9-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Clearing Jams  
When <Paper jam.> appears on the display, a paper jam has  
occurred in the feeder or inside the machine. Following the  
procedure displayed on the screen, remove the jammed  
document or paper.  
IMPORTANT  
If paper is torn  
Remove any torn pieces to avoid further jams.  
"Document Jams in the Feeder" (→P.9-2)  
"Paper Jams in the Paper Cassette (Cassette 1 or 2)" (→P.9-3)  
"Paper Jams in the Multi-purpose Tray (MF8350Cdn Only)" (→  
P.9-4)  
"Paper Jams in the Manual Feed Slot (MF8050Cn Only)" (→  
P.9-5)  
If repeated paper jams occur  
Check the following.  
•
•
•
Fan and tap the paper stack on a flat surface before loading it in the  
machine.  
Check that the paper you are using meets the requirements for use.  
"Paper Requirements" (→P.2-6)  
"Paper Jams in the Rear Cover or Duplex Unit (MF8350Cdn  
Only)" (→P.9-6)  
Make sure that you have removed any scraps of paper from the  
"Paper Jams in the Output Area (MF8350Cdn Only)" (→P.9-7)  
"Paper Jams in the Output Area and Rear Cover (MF8050Cn  
Only)" (→P.9-8)  
inside of the machine.  
NOTE- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
WARNING  
Do not force the jammed document or paper out of the  
machine  
Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line for  
When removing the jammed document or paper  
Take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the document or  
paper.  
assistance if needed.  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Document Jams in the Feeder  
When removing jammed paper or when inspecting  
the inside of the machine  
Do not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the  
inside of the machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.  
Referring to the procedure on the display, follow the steps  
below to remove jammed documents.  
Keys to be used for this operation  
CAUTION  
If loose toner comes into contact with your skin or  
clothing  
Wash with cold water. Warm water will set the toner.  
When removing the jammed document or paper  
When a paper jam occurs, follow the message displayed in the screen  
to remove jammed paper completely without a piece of paper  
remaining. Also, do not put your hands forcibly into the parts other  
than the parts directed on the screen. Failure to do so may result in  
burns or injuries.  
Press [ ].  
1
Paper jam.  
Press [ ] to  
display steps.  
Remove the document loaded in the feeder.  
2
9-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Open the feeder cover.  
Press [ ].  
Press [OK] to exit the operation screen.  
3
4
1
2
Paper jam.  
Press [ ] to  
display steps.  
(End: Press [OK])  
Pull out the paper cassette.  
Hold the paper cassette with both hands.  
Remove the jammed document by pulling it  
gently  
If the optional paper cassette (Cassette 2) is installed in MF8350Cdn,  
pull out the optional paper cassette also.  
Remove the paper by pulling it gently.  
3
Close the feeder cover.  
5
6
Place documents in the feeder.  
Paper Jams in the Paper Cassette (Cassette 1  
or 2)  
Referring to the procedure on the display, follow the steps  
below to remove jammed paper.  
* Cassette 2 (optional) can be used only for MF8350Cdn.  
Insert the paper cassette into the machine.  
If the optional paper cassette (Cassette 2) is installed in MF8350Cdn,  
close the optional paper cassette also.  
4
5
Keys to be used for this operation  
When the following screen appears, select <Yes>  
with [ ], and then press [OK].  
The machine is ready to print.  
Is all of the jammed  
paper removed?  
Yes  
No  
OK  
9-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Paper Jams in the Multi-purpose Tray  
(MF8350Cdn Only)  
Referring to the procedure on the display, follow the steps  
below to remove jammed paper.  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Pull out the paper cassette.  
Hold the paper cassette with both hands.  
4
5
OK  
Press [ ].  
Press [OK] to exit the operation screen.  
1
Lower the manual feed transport guide.  
(1) Hold the tabs (A) on both sides.  
(2) Push them down.  
Paper jam.  
Press [ ] to  
display steps.  
(End: Press [OK])  
Remove the paper by pulling it gently.  
2
(A)  
IMPORTANT  
Do not touch the rubber pad (A)  
Touching it may result in deterioration in print quality.  
If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily  
Do not try to remove it forcefully but proceed to Step 3.  
Close the multi-purpose tray.  
3
(A)  
9-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Paper Jams in the Manual Feed Slot  
(MF8050Cn Only)  
Remove the paper by pulling it gently.  
6
Referring to the procedure on the display, follow the steps  
below to remove jammed paper.  
Keys to be used for this operation  
If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily  
Do not try to remove it forcefully but proceed to Step 7.  
Return the manual feed transport guide to its  
original position.  
7
OK  
Press [ ].  
Press [OK] to exit the operation screen.  
1
Paper jam.  
Insert the paper cassette into the machine.  
8
9
Press [ ] to  
display steps.  
(End: Press [OK])  
When the following screen appears, select <Yes>  
with [ ], and then press [OK].  
The machine is ready to print.  
Is all of the jammed  
paper removed?  
Pull out the paper cassette.  
Hold the paper cassette with both hands.  
2
Yes  
No  
NOTE- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
If the jammed paper cannot be removed in Step 6  
See "Paper Jams in the Rear Cover or Duplex Unit (MF8350Cdn Only)"  
(→P.9-6) and remove the paper.  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Open the manual feed slot cover.  
3
9-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Paper Jams in the Rear Cover or Duplex Unit  
(MF8350Cdn Only)  
Lower the manual feed transport guide.  
(1) Hold the tabs (A) on both sides.  
(2) Push them down.  
4
5
Referring to the procedure on the display, follow the steps  
below to remove jammed paper.  
Keys to be used for this operation  
(A)  
Remove the paper by pulling it gently.  
Press [ ].  
1
Paper jam.  
Press [ ] to  
display steps.  
Return the manual feed transport guide to its  
original position.  
6
7
Open the rear cover.  
2
(1)  
Close the manual feed slot cover.  
(2)  
Open the paper output guide by holding the  
green tab (A).  
3
Insert the paper cassette into the machine.  
8
9
When the following screen appears, select <Yes>  
with [ ], and then press [OK].  
(A)  
The machine is ready to print.  
Is all of the jammed  
paper removed?  
Yes  
No  
9-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Paper Jams in the Output Area (MF8350Cdn  
Only)  
Remove the paper by pulling it gently.  
4
Referring to the procedure on the display, follow the steps  
below to remove jammed paper.  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Make sure that no paper is jammed inside the paper output guide,  
and then close it.  
Remove the paper by pulling it gently.  
5
6
Press [ ].  
1
Paper jam.  
Press [ ] to  
display steps.  
Holding the tabs (A) on both sides, close the  
duplex unit.  
Close the guide firmly until it clicks.  
Open the front cover.  
2
(A)  
(A)  
Remove the paper by pulling it gently.  
7
8
Lift the scanning platform.  
3
Remove the paper by pulling it gently.  
4
Close the rear cover.  
The machine is ready to print.  
Lower the scanning platform.  
5
9-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Close the front cover.  
The machine is ready to print.  
Open the rear cover.  
6
5
6
7
Paper Jams in the Output Area and Rear  
Cover (MF8050Cn Only)  
(1)  
(2)  
Referring to the procedure on the display, follow the steps  
below to remove jammed paper.  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Remove the paper by pulling it gently.  
Press [ ].  
1
Close the rear cover.  
The machine is ready to print.  
Paper jam.  
Press [ ] to  
display steps.  
Lift the scanning platform.  
2
Remove the paper by pulling it gently.  
3
Lower the scanning platform.  
4
9-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Display Messages  
If messages appear, see the following and solve the problem.  
e-Manual → Troubleshooting → Display Messages  
Error Code  
An error code is a 3-digit code recorded as an error log when an error occurs.  
You can check the code in the following locations.  
•
•
•
Error send report  
Error receive report  
Job history in the system status screen  
Error codes for fax jobs  
Error codes for print jobs  
•
Job history in the system status screen  
2010 01/01 02:07AM FAX  
0001  
＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊  
＊＊＊ ＊＊＊  
Error Report (Send)  
＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊  
Send job resulted in error.  
Job No.  
Address  
Name  
0123  
0123456789  
name  
Start Time  
01/01 02:07 AM  
Call Length  
Sheets  
01'15  
1
Result  
NG  
#018  
Busy/No Signal  
Error code  
For details on the reports, see the following.  
e-Manual → Basic Operation → Setting the Auto Printing Reports  
For details on the error code, see the following.  
Cause  
Action  
A document may be jammed.  
Remove the jammed document.  
#001  
#003  
Cause  
Because the data is too large, it is taking excessive time to send/receive the document.  
Reduce the scanning resolution, and then send the document.  
Action 1  
Action 2  
Cause 1  
Reduce the scanning resolution or ask the sender to divide the document before sending it.  
The recipient did not respond within 35 seconds.  
Repeat the procedure from the first step. Additionally, ask the recipient to check the fax machine. If you are  
making an overseas call, add a pause to the fax number.  
Action  
#005  
#012  
Cause 2  
The recipient may not be using a G3 fax machine.  
Ask the recipient what type of fax machine is being used, and then send the document to the recipient's G3 fax  
machine. If the recipient does not have a G3 fax machine, send the document again using a communication  
mode compatible with the recipient's fax machine.  
Action  
Cause  
Action  
Cause 1  
The recipient's machine has run out of paper.  
Ask the recipient to make sure that paper is loaded in their machine.  
Redialing was not able to obtain any response. The recipient was not able to respond due to a telephone call etc.  
Wait a moment, and then try again. Nevertheless, if you cannot send the document, ask the recipient to make  
sure that their fax machine is turned ON. If the recipient is making a telephone call, wait a moment, and then send  
the document again.  
Action  
Cause 2  
Action  
You were not able to send the document because the recipient was making a telephone call etc.  
Make sure that the recipient can communicate with you, and then try again.  
The settings of the recipient's machine are different from those of yours.  
#018  
Cause 3  
Action  
Make sure that the recipient can communicate with you, and then try again.  
A pause was not added to the fax number when you made an overseas fax.  
Cause 4  
Add a pause after the country code or the recipient's fax number, and then redial the number. If you want to send  
the document to the recipient registered under a one-touch key, change the settings for international sending in  
the detailed setting screen.  
Action  
9-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Cause  
Action  
Sending faxes from a computer is restricted.  
The restriction needs to be released. Contact your administrator for more details.  
#022  
#037  
→
→
→
e-Manual Security Restricting Destination Operations/Sending Functions Restricting Faxes Sent from a  
Computer  
Cause 1  
Action 1  
The machine's memory is full.  
Print, send, or delete any documents stored in the memory.  
For a copy job, divide the document into two or set <Original Type> to <Text/Photo/Map (Speed)> before  
copying.  
Action 2  
→
→
e-Manual Copy Selecting Image Quality (Copy)  
Cause 2  
Action  
Cause 1  
Action  
The data size exceeds the machine's memory size.  
Reduce the data resolution or change the file format to reduce the data size.  
When a fax is sent from a computer, the user abbreviation or the user fax number is not registered.  
Register the user abbreviation and the user fax number.  
#054  
#099  
When a fax is sent from a computer or when the destination is imported from the address book, the recipient's fax  
number exceeds 40 digits.  
Cause 2  
Action  
Cause  
Register the recipient's fax number again.  
You canceled the job in a user's operation.  
Action  
Cause 1  
Action  
Cause 2  
Send it again as needed.  
Authentication of ID or PIN failed due to departmental ID management.  
Specify the correct department ID or PIN, repeat the operation.  
Unknown ID jobs are restricted.  
#701  
The restriction needs to be released. Contact your administrator for more details.  
→
→
→
e-Manual Security Specifying the Setting for Departmental ID Management Specifying Whether or Not  
Action  
to Receive a Print Job from an Unknown ID  
→
→
→
e-Manual Security Specifying the Setting for Departmental ID Management Specifying Whether or Not  
to Receive a Scan Job from an Unknown ID  
Cause  
Action  
Cause  
Action  
The job cannot be printed due to the incorrect image format.  
#822  
#852  
Repeat the operation.  
An error has occurred because the main power switch was turned OFF while a job was being processed.  
Repeat the operation.  
The job was not able to be processed due to the reason why it was canceled from an application or operating  
system while the print data was being sent to this machine from a computer etc.  
Cause  
#853  
#861  
Action  
Cause 1  
Action  
Cause 2  
Action  
Cause  
Check the settings, and then repeat the operation.  
Printing cannot be performed because print data was received from a printer driver which is not for the machine.  
Print the data again from the printer driver for the machine.  
Printing cannot be performed because print data is broken.  
Repeat the operation.  
A process problem in the printer has occurred, and the machine does not operate properly  
Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for more than 10 seconds, and then turn it ON again.  
If the problem is not solved, turn OFF the main power switch, disconnect the power cord, and contact your local  
authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.  
#863  
#995  
Action  
Cause  
Action  
The job waiting to be sent or received has canceled by a user.  
Retry to send or receive the job as needed.  
9-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If <Incorrect size/setting> Appears  
The message appears when the paper size specified in <Drawer 1>, <Drawer 2>*, or <Multi-Purpose Tray> in the <Paper Settings>  
menu is different from the size of the paper loaded in the paper cassette or multi-purpose tray. If the message appears, perform the  
following operations.  
* Cassette 2 (optional) can be used only for MF8350Cdn.  
Change the <Paper Settings> menu according to the size of the loaded paper.  
After canceling a job, see "Setting a Paper Size and Type" (→P.2-16), and then change <Paper Settings>.  
IMPORTANT  
For a print job  
Check that the paper size setting on the computer is also correct.  
Loading paper of the size specified in the <Paper Settings> menu  
See "Loading Paper" (→P.2-9) and reload the paper specified in the <Paper Settings> menu.  
Printing from the multi-purpose tray/manual feed slot  
When <Register Default Set.> is set to <Off> for the multi-purpose tray, load paper in the multi-purpose tray/manual feed slot, and  
then specify the size of the loaded paper correctly.  
9-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
If problems occur during use of the machine, check the following items before requesting service, and then take appropriate action.  
Check the Following First  
Is the power switch turned ON?  
Check that the power cord is securely plugged into the machine and into the wall outlet.  
Check if electricity is supplied from the power cord. Use another power cord or check if the cord is broken using a voltmeter.  
Turn ON the main power switch.  
If there is no problem  
Has the power switch been just turned ON?  
Wait a moment until the machine starts.  
If there is no problem  
Is the machine in Sleep mode?  
Press [  
] (Energy Saver) on the operation panel to cancel the Sleep mode.  
If there is no problem  
Is the Error indicator on or blinking?  
Make sure that paper is loaded properly in the paper cassette or multi-purpose tray.  
"Loading Paper" (→P.2-9)  
Check if paper is jammed.  
"Clearing Jams" (→P.9-2)  
Turn OFF the main power switch of the machine, wait for more than 10 seconds, and then turn it ON. If the problem is solved, the  
Error indicator is turned off, and the display returns to standby mode. If the Error indicator keeps blinking, unplug the power cord,  
and contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.  
If there is no problem  
9-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Is a message displayed on the display?  
Check if an error message appears on the display of the operation panel.  
"Display Messages" (→P.9-9)  
Print the transmission management report to check if an error occurs.  
e-Manual → Basic Operation → Printing a List → Printing a Fax Activity Report  
If there is no problem  
Is the telephone line connected or configured properly?  
Check that the telephone cable is correctly connected. Check if the cables for the telephone line port and external device port on  
the back of the machine are connected inversely.  
"Configuring and Connecting the Fax" (→ Starter Guide)  
Make sure the machine is set for the correct telephone line type (dial/push).  
"Select Line Type" (→P.6-18)  
Check if there is a device nearby that interferes with signal reception (e.g., microwave oven). This may affect the telephone line  
status.  
If You Cannot Solve a Problem  
If You Cannot Solve a Problem  
See "Troubleshooting" in the e-Manual, then solve the problem.  
9-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If a Power Failure Occurs  
The machine cannot be used while power supply is cut off.  
The fax function during a power failure  
• Documents cannot be sent or received.  
• You may not be able to make a call using the external telephone. However, the above varies depending on your telephone.  
• You may be able to get a call using the external telephone. However, the above varies depending on your telephone.  
IMPORTANT  
Data storage for when power supply is cut off  
Even if power is suddenly lost due to a power failure or accidental unplugging, any sent or received documents stored in memory are backed up for  
about 5 minutes.  
NOTE- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Charging the built-in battery  
It takes approximately 5 hours to completely charge the built-in battery after the machine is turned ON.  
If the built-in battery is not charged enough, data may not be saved properly in the memory.  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
9-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If You Cannot Solve a Problem  
Customer Support (U.S.A.)  
If you cannot solve the problem after having referred to the information in this chapter, contact Canon Customer Care Center at  
1-800-OK-CANON Monday through Friday between the hours of 8:00 A.M. to 8:00 P.M. EST. On-line support is also available 24 hours  
a day at the website http://www.canontechsupport.com.  
Please have the following information ready when you contact Canon:  
• Product name (Color imageCLASS MF8350Cdn/MF8050Cn)  
• Serial number (a character string which consists of three alphabets and a 5-digit number and is indicated on the label located  
inside the front cover of the machine)  
ꢀ MF8350Cdn  
ꢀ MF8050Cn  
Serial No.  
Serial No.  
Serial Number  
Serial Number  
• Place of purchase  
• Nature of problem  
• Steps you have taken to solve the problem and the results  
WARNING  
If the machine makes strange noises, emits smoke or odd odor, turn OFF the main power switch immediately, disconnect the power cord, and contact  
Canon Customer Care Center. Do not attempt to disassemble or repair the machine yourself.  
IMPORTANT  
Attempting to repair the machine yourself may void the limited warranty.  
9-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Customer Support (Canada)  
Canon Canada Inc., offers a full range of customer technical support options*:  
* Support program specifics are subject to change without notice.  
• For step-by-step troubleshooting, e-mail technical support, the latest driver or document downloads, and answers to frequently  
asked questions, visit  
http://www.canon.ca/  
• Free live technical support 9 A.M. to 8 P.M. EST Monday through Friday (excluding holidays) for products still under warranty  
1-800-OK-CANON  
• For the location of the authorized service facility nearest you, visit http://www.canon.ca/ or 1-800-OK-CANON  
• If the problem cannot be corrected by using one of the above technical support options, repair options are available at the time  
of your call to the live technical support number above or via the website at http://www.canon.ca/  
* Support program specifics are subject to change without notice.  
Please have the following information ready when you contact Canon:  
• Product name (Color imageCLASS MF8350Cdn/MF8050Cn)  
• Serial number (a character string which consists of three alphabets and a 5-digit number and is indicated on the label located  
inside the front cover of the machine)  
ꢀ MF8350Cdn  
ꢀ MF8050Cn  
Serial No.  
Serial No.  
Serial Number  
Serial Number  
• Place of purchase  
• Nature of problem  
• Steps you have taken to solve the problem and the results  
WARNING  
If the machine makes strange noises, emits smoke or odd odor, turn OFF the main power switch immediately, disconnect the power cord, and contact  
Canon Customer Care Center. Do not attempt to disassemble or repair the machine yourself.  
IMPORTANT  
Attempting to repair the machine yourself may void the limited warranty.  
9-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
10  
Registering/Setting the Various Functions  
You can set or change machine functions from the setting menu according to your purpose.  
Setting Menu List  
10-2  
Printing a User Data List  
10-2  
10-2  
Contents of the Setting Menu  
10-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Menu List  
Printing a User Data List  
To see the contents of current settings, print out user's data list.  
[Select <User Data> with [ ] or [ ], and then  
press [OK].  
3
4
Keys to be used for this operation  
Report  
Make sure that the paper is loaded, and then  
press [OK].  
Load the paper indicated in the display.  
Supported paper:  
Size: A4, LTR  
Type: P1/2, Rec, Clr  
OK  
OK  
Select <Yes> with [ ], and then press [OK].  
Printing starts.  
5
Press [  
] (Report).  
1
2
Print user data  
report list?  
Select <Print Report Lists> with [ ] or [ ], and  
then press [OK].  
Yes  
No  
Contents of the Setting Menu  
[Address Book] key  
[Select Paper/Settings] key  
[Menu] key  
[Report] key  
Register the following types of destination.  
- One-touch keys  
- Coded dialing  
Register the size and type of the  
paper to be used.  
You can also register a custom paper  
size.  
Configure the machine settings.  
You can perform adjustment and  
cleaning.  
You can specify the settings for  
various report output conditions and  
output a report.  
- Group dialing  
Viewing the Route Map  
Menu Operations  
Returns to the previous hierarchy.  
This area represents the first hierarchy in the menu.  
Proceeds to the next hierarchy.  
Selects an upper item/setting value.  
Selects a lower item/setting value.  
Timer Settings  
This area represents  
hierarchies for "setting values."  
The setting values with the  
gray background or of the  
boldface represents the default  
settings.  
Time&Date Settings  
Date Display Type  
P.1-12  
YYYY MM/DD  
MM/DD/YYYY  
DD/MM YYYY  
Proceeds to the next hierarchy. Also, a setting  
value is determined, and an operation is  
OK  
performed.  
* When <Apply> appears in the screen, you need to select  
These represents reference areas in this manual.  
For the items with the icon, see the e-Manual.  
<Apply> and press [OK] after specifying the setting.  
Back  
Reset  
This area represents hierarchies for "setting item."  
Returns to the previous hierarchy.  
- Settings or values with " * " mark may not appear depending on the availability of the optional accessories.  
- Settings or values with " " mark appear only in MF8350Cdn.  
Cancels the setting and returns to the initial  
screen.  
10-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Address Book  
Menu  
<How to display>  
<How to display>  
1
2
3
4
Press [FAX].  
1
2
Press [Menu].  
Press [Address Book].  
The address book is displayed.  
The setting menu is displayed.  
Press [ ] to select [  
], and then press [OK].  
1
1
2
2
3
4
Sound Volume Control  
Coded Dial  
Fax  
P.5-6  
Volume Key Priority  
Fax Volume Settings  
CD-ROM  
Settings Menu Priority  
- Fax Tone:  
Off,On(Fax Volume: 1 to 3)  
Max 16 Char.  
Max 40  
Name  
Destination  
Settings  
Off  
Ring Tone  
CD-ROM  
On  
Off  
ECM Sending  
- Ring Tone Volume: 1 to 3  
On  
Off  
Sending Done Tone  
CD-ROM  
33600 bps  
14400 bps  
9600 bps  
4800 bps  
Speed  
On  
- Sending Done Volume:  
1 to 3  
For Errors Only  
- Sending Done Volume:  
1 to 3  
Domestic  
Long Distance  
International (1)  
International (2)  
International (3)  
Off  
Receiving Done Tone  
CD-ROM  
On  
- Receiving Done Volume:  
1 to 3  
Coded Dial:Registration No.  
Group  
For Errors Only  
- Receiving Done Volume:  
1 to 3  
Max 16 characters  
Name  
Select Coded Dial/One-Touch Dial  
Off  
Destination  
Scanning Done Tone  
CD-ROM  
On  
- Scanning Done Volume :  
1 to 3  
One-Touch Dial  
Fax  
P.5-3  
For Errors Only  
- Scanning Done Volume :  
1 to 3  
Enter Registration No.  
Max 16 characters  
Max 40  
Name  
Destination  
Settings  
Off  
Entry Tone  
CD-ROM  
CD-ROM  
CD-ROM  
CD-ROM  
On  
Off  
ECM Sending  
Off  
Entry Error Tone  
Warning Tone  
Job Done Tone  
On  
On  
33600 bps  
14400 bps  
9600 bps  
4800 bps  
Speed  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Domestic  
Long Distance  
International (1)  
International (2)  
International (3)  
Common Settings  
Copy  
Select Default Screen  
CD-ROM  
Fax  
Scan  
One-Touch Dial:Registration No.  
Group  
Status Monitor/Cancel  
Enter Registration No.  
Name  
Off  
Status Monitor/Cancel Device Priority  
CD-ROM  
Max 16 characters  
On  
Select Coded Dial/One-Touch Dial  
Destination  
1 to 5  
Brightness  
CD-ROM  
CD-ROM  
CD-ROM  
One-Touch Dial: Registration No.  
1 to 4 to 7  
Contrast  
Select Paper/Settings  
Off  
Invert Screen Colors  
<How to display>  
On  
1
2
3
Press [Select Paper/Settings].  
Default Screen  
Screen After Auto Reset  
Inch Entry  
CD-ROM  
CD-ROM  
CD-ROM  
The paper selection screen is displayed.  
Press [ ] to select [Paper Settings], and then press [OK].  
Selected Screen  
Off  
On  
Gram/Pound Switch  
Gram  
2
Pound  
3
1
"Setting a Paper Size and Type" (P. 2-16)  
Continues to the next page  
10-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Continues from the previous page  
Continues from the lower left  
Drawer Auto-Slection  
CD-ROM  
Sender ID  
P.6-22  
Off  
On  
Copy  
Multi-Purpose Tray  
On Image  
Print Location  
Off  
Above Image  
On  
FAX  
Mark No. as TEL/FAX  
Off  
Drawer 1  
Drawer 2*  
TEL  
On  
Receive Settings  
Off  
On  
P.6-24  
P.6-24  
Off  
2-sided Printing  
On  
Printer  
Receive Data Reduction  
Off  
Off  
Drawer 1  
On  
On  
- Reduction Mode:  
Auto, Preset  
Drawer 2*  
Off  
- Reduction Ratio:  
97, 95, 90, 75(%)  
- Reduction Direction:  
Vertical/Horizontal, Vertical  
On  
Fax  
Off  
Multi-Purpose Tray  
P.6-24  
P.6-24  
Off  
Received Page Footer  
On  
On  
Off  
Drawer 1  
Off  
Continue Printing When Toner Is Low  
On  
On  
Drawer 2*  
Off  
Fax Settings  
CD-ROM  
On  
Basic Settings  
Fax No.  
Other  
P.6-22  
P.6-22  
Off  
Multi-Purpose Tray  
Dial 10 PPS  
Select Line Type  
On  
Tone  
Off  
Drawer 1  
Offhook Alarm  
P.6-22  
Off  
On  
On  
- Offhook Alarm Volume:  
1 to 3  
Drawer 2*  
Off  
On  
Send Settings  
ECM Sending  
Paper Feed Method Switch  
Multi-Purpose Tray  
CD-ROM  
P.6-22  
Off  
Print Speed Priority  
On  
Print Side Priority  
Pause Time  
Auto Redial  
P.6-23  
P.6-23  
1 to 2 to 15 (seconds)  
Print Speed Priority  
Drawer 1  
Drawer 2*  
Language  
Print Side Priority  
Off  
On  
Print Speed Priority  
Print Side Priority  
1 to 2 to 10 (times)  
2 to 99 (minutes)  
Redial Times  
French  
Spanish  
CD-ROM  
Redial Interval  
Off  
Redial If Error Occurs  
Portuguese  
On  
English  
Off  
Check Dial Tone Before Sending P.6-23  
French  
Spanish  
Remote UI Language  
CD-ROM  
On  
Receive Settings  
Portuguese  
ECM Receiving  
Incoming Ring  
P.6-24  
P.6-25  
Off  
English  
On  
1 to 2 to 5 (seconds)  
Slow, Normal, Fast  
Massage Display Time  
Scrolling Speed  
CD-ROM  
CD-ROM  
CD-ROM  
Off  
On  
- Ring Times:  
Auto  
Cursor Movement  
1 to 2 to 99 (times)  
Manual  
Remote Receiving  
Manual/Auto Switch  
P.6-25  
P.6-25  
Off  
Sound Volume Control  
Common Settings  
Copy Settings  
Initialize Menu  
CD-ROM  
On  
- Remote Receive ID:  
00 to 25 to 99  
Memory Media Settings  
Send/Receive Settings  
Printer Settings  
Off  
On  
- Incoming Ring Times:  
1 to 15 to 99 (seconds)  
Timer Settings  
Initialize All  
Printer Settings  
Copy Settings  
Auto Size Detection  
CD-ROM  
Off  
On  
Change Defaults  
Change Defaults  
CD-ROM  
Timer Settings  
Memory Media Settings  
Time&Date Settings  
Date Display Type  
P.1-12  
CD-ROM  
YYYY MM/DD  
MM/DD/YYYY  
DD/MM YYYY  
Send/Receive Settings  
12 Hour (AM/PM)  
12/24 Hour Clock  
Common Settings  
Send Settings  
24 Hour  
Current Time Settings  
Daylight Saving  
Register Username  
Change Defaults  
P.6-22  
P.6-22  
Off  
On  
- Start: (M/W/D)  
- End: (M/W/D)  
Continues to the upper right  
Continues to the next page  
10-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Continues from the lower left  
Continues from the previous page  
Sleep Timer  
P.1-11  
10 to 240 (minutes) (MF8350Cdn)  
20 to 240 (minutes) (MF8050Cn)  
Auto Obtain  
Select Protocol  
Off  
0=Off, 1 to 2 to 9 (minutes)  
0=Off, 1 to 5 to 60 (minutes)  
Auto Reset Timer  
CD-ROM  
DHCP  
BOOTP  
RARP  
Auto Offline Time  
CD-ROM  
Adjustment/Cleaning  
Off  
Auto IP  
Auto Gradation Adjustment  
Auto Adjustment Settings  
CD-ROM  
Full Adjustment  
Express Adjustment  
Copy Image Adjustment  
On  
Manual Entry  
0.0.0.0  
0.0.0.0  
0.0.0.0  
IP Address  
CD-ROM  
Subnet Mask  
Gateway Address  
Off  
Auto Adjust Image Regularly  
On  
Off  
Correct Color Mismatch when turned ON  
View Settings  
On  
Auto Obtain  
Correct Print Color Mismatch  
CD-ROM  
CD-ROM  
IP Address  
Subnet Mask  
Gateway Address  
Black Text Processing for Color  
Feeder  
-3 to 0 to +3  
-3 to 0 to +3  
Document Glass  
0.0.0.0  
PING Command  
Special Processing  
CD-ROM  
DNS Settings  
Special Paper Processing  
Manual 2-Sided Settings  
Multi-Purpose Tray  
DNS Server Settings  
0.0.0.0  
0.0.0.0  
Primary DNS Server  
Off  
Secondary DNS Server  
On  
DNS Host Name/Domain Name Settings  
Off  
Drawer 1  
Drawer 2*  
Host Name  
On  
Domein Name  
Off  
On  
Off  
DNS Dynamic Update Settings  
mDNS Settings  
Rough Paper Settings  
Multi-Purpose Tray  
On  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
Off  
Drawer 1  
Drawer 2*  
- mDNS Name  
On  
Off  
IPv6 Settings  
Use IPv6  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
Envelope Cling Prevention  
Envelope Switch  
View Settings  
On  
Off  
On  
Envelop 1  
Stateless Address Settings  
Use DHCPv6  
Envelop 2  
View Settings  
Off  
Special Mode P  
Off  
On  
On  
Clean Fixing Unit  
Clean ITB  
P.8-2  
P.8-3  
P.8-4  
View Settings  
DNS Settings  
Clean Feeder  
DNS Host Name/Domein Name Settings  
Use IPv4 Host/Domain  
Off  
- Host Name  
- Domain Name  
System Settings  
On  
Off  
On  
System Manager Information  
System Manager ID and PIN  
CD-ROM  
DNS Dynamic Update Settings  
- System Manager ID:  
Up to seven digits  
- System Manager PIN:  
UP to seven digits  
- Register Manual Address:  
Off, On  
- Register Stateful Address:  
Off, On  
Up to 32 characters  
System Manager  
- Register Stateless Address:  
Off, On  
Device Information  
Device Name  
Location  
CD-ROM  
Off  
mDNS Settings  
Up to 32 characters  
Up to 32 characters  
On  
- Use IPv4 name for  
mDNS:  
Dept.ID Management  
CD-ROM  
Off  
Off (mDNS Name), On  
On  
WINS Settings  
Count Management Report  
Off  
WINS Resolution  
Network Settings  
TCP/IP Settings  
IPv4 Settings  
CD-ROM  
On  
- WINS Server Address:  
0.0.0.0  
Scope ID  
IP Address Settings  
NetBIOS Name  
Workgroup Name  
Continues to the upper right  
Continues to the next page  
10-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Continues from the previous page  
Continues from the lower left  
Off  
Off  
LPD Settings  
Remote UI On/Off  
CD-ROM  
On  
On  
Off  
RAW Settings  
Restrict Sending  
On  
Address Book PIN  
P.6-27  
WSD Settings  
Off  
Restrict New Destinations P.6-27  
Off  
On  
Use WSD Settings  
On  
Allow Driver Faxing  
P.6-27  
Off  
Off  
On  
Use WSD Browsing  
On  
Off  
Restrict Sending from History P.6-27  
Fax No. Confirmation Re-Entry P.6-27  
Restrict Sequential Broadcast P.6-27  
Off  
On  
Use Multicast Discovery  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
Use HTTP  
Off  
On  
Confirm Sequential Broadcast  
Reject Sequential Broadcast  
Port Number Settings  
0 to 515 to 65535  
0 to 9100 to 65535  
0 to 80 to 65535  
0 to 161 to 65535  
LPD  
Off  
Display Job History  
CD-ROM  
CD-ROM  
CD-ROM  
CD-ROM  
RAW  
HTTP  
SNMP  
On  
Off  
USB Device On/Off  
On  
Off  
SNMP Settings  
Off  
Memory Media Storage On/Off  
On  
On  
public  
Community Name 1  
Select PDL (Plug-n-Play)  
Network  
(None)  
Community Name 2  
FAX  
Off  
Writable SNMP 1/Writable SNMP 2  
UFRII LT  
On  
UFRII LT(XPS)  
Off  
Dedicated Community Settings  
Printer Management Infomation from Host  
UFRII LT  
USB  
Read-Write (RW)  
Read-Only (RO)  
UFRII LT(XPS)  
Update the Firmware  
Initialize Address Book  
Initialize System Settings  
CD-ROM  
CD-ROM  
CD-ROM  
Off  
On  
System Manager Information  
Device Information  
Off  
Enable Dedicated Port  
Startup Settings  
On  
Dept. ID Management  
Network Settings  
Restrict Sending  
0 to 300 (Seconds)  
Display Job History  
Ethernet Driver Settings  
Auto Detect  
Communications Settings  
Forwarding Settings  
USB Device On/Off  
Memory Media Storage On/Off  
Select PDL (Plug-n-Play)  
Initialize All  
Off  
- Communication Mode:  
Half Duplex, Full Duplex  
- Ethernet Type:  
Store/Print When Forwarding  
Remote UI On/Off  
10 Base-T, 100 Base-TX  
On  
Reports  
MAC Address  
<How to display>  
Communications Settings  
Fax Settings  
1
2
Press [Report].  
The report output menu is displayed.  
1
P.6-26  
P.6-26  
33600 bps  
14400 bps  
9600 bps  
7200 bps  
4800 bps  
2400 bps  
Send Start Speed  
Receive Start Speed  
2
Memory Lock Settings  
P.6-26  
Off  
On  
Memory Lock PIN  
Print Report  
Reports Settings  
Send Results  
CD-ROM  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
Do Not Set  
Memory Lock Time  
For Errors Only  
Set  
Off  
TX Image Report  
- Memory Lock Start Time  
- Memory Lock End Time  
On  
Transmission Management  
P.6-26  
United States (US)  
Canada (CA)  
Brazil (BR)  
Select Country/Region  
Auto Print After 40 Transmissions  
Separate Send/Receive  
Receive Report  
Off  
On  
Mexico (MX)  
Other  
Off  
On  
P.6-14  
Off  
Forwarding Settings  
Off  
On  
On  
Store/Print When Forwarding  
Print Images  
CD-ROM  
For Errors Only  
Print Reports Lists  
Address Book List  
CD-ROM  
Off  
On  
Coded Dial  
One-Touch  
Group  
For Errors Only  
Do Not Store  
User Data  
Store Images in Memory  
For Errors Only  
Fax Activity Report  
Continues to the upper right  
10-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
11  
Appendix  
This section describes the specifications of the machine.  
Main Specifications  
11-2  
Machine Specifications  
11-2  
11-2  
11-2  
11-3  
11-3  
11-3  
11-3  
Copy Specifications  
Printer Specification  
Scanner Specifications  
Fax Specifications  
Telephone Specifications  
Cassette Feeding Unit-V1 (optional) (MF8350Cdn Only)  
Index  
11-4  
11-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Main Specifications  
Machine Specifications  
Copy Specifications  
Machine Specifications  
Copy Specifications  
•
•
•
Text/Photo/Map (Speed) (Color): 300 dpi x 300  
dpi  
Text/Photo/Map, Text/Photo/Map (Speed)  
(B/W): 300 dpi x 600 dpi  
Text/Photo/Map (Quality), Printed Image, Text:  
600 dpi x 600 dpi  
Type  
Personal Desktop  
120 to 127 V 60 Hz (Power requirements  
differ depending on the country in which you  
purchased the product.)  
Power Supply  
Scanning Resolution  
•
MF8350Cdn  
Maximum: 1,200 W or less  
Average consumption during standby mode:  
Approx. 23 W  
Average consumption during sleep mode:  
Approx. 3 W  
Output Resolution  
Copy Ratio  
600 dpi x 600 dpi  
•
•
•
•
Direct 1:1 1.0 %  
Enlargement 1:4.00, 1:2.00, 1:1.29  
Reduction 1:0.78, 1:0.64, 1:0.50, 1:0.25  
Zoom 0.25 to 4.00, 1% increments  
Power Consumption  
•
MF8050Cn  
Maximum: 900 W or less  
Average consumption during standby mode:  
Approx. 15 W  
Average consumption during sleep mode:  
Approx. 3 W  
•
•
MF8350Cdn  
Color: 21 ppm  
B/W: 21 ppm  
MF8050Cn  
Copy Speed (Letter Direct)  
•
•
MF8350Cdn  
23 seconds or less*  
Color: 8 ppm  
B/W: 12 ppm  
MF8050Cn  
30 seconds or less*  
Successive Copying Capacity Maximum 99 copies  
(Temperature: 68 °F (20 °C), humidity: 65% RH  
; from when the machine is turned on with the  
main power switch to when the standby display  
appears)  
* Warm-up time may vary depending on the  
condition and environment around the  
machine.  
Warm-up Time  
•
•
MF8350Cdn  
Color: 17 seconds or less  
B&W: 16 seconds or less  
MF8050Cn  
First Copy Time (Letter)  
Color: 30 seconds or less  
B&W: 23 seconds or less  
•
•
MF8350Cdn  
Main unit (including toner cartridge): Approx.  
68.3 lb (31 kg)  
MF8050Cn  
Main unit (including toner cartridge): Approx.  
55.1 lb (25 kg)  
Weight  
Printer Specification  
Printer Specification  
Indirect electrostatic system (On-demand fixing)  
•
MF8350Cdn  
-
In the normal state  
Printing Method  
17" x 19 1/8" x 18 7/8" (430 mm x 484 mm x  
479 mm)  
•
MF8350Cdn  
Multi-purpose tray: Approx 50 sheets (16 to 24  
-
When the Cassette Feeding Unit-V1 (optional)  
is installed  
17" x 19 1/8" x 22 7/8" (430 mm x 484 mm x  
579 mm)  
Dimensions  
(W x L x H)  
lb Bond (60 to 90 g/m2))  
Paper cassette: Approx 250 sheets (16 to 24 lb  
Bond (60 to 90 g/m2))  
Paper Capacity  
Cassette Feeding Unit-V1 (optional): Approx 250  
sheets (16 to 24 lb Bond (60 to 90 g/m2))  
MF8050Cn  
•
•
MF8050Cn  
17" x 19 1/8" x 16 7/8" (430 mm x 484 mm x 429  
mm)  
•
Manual feed slot: 1 sheet  
MF8350Cdn  
Paper cassette: Approx 150 sheets (16 to 24 lb  
-
In the normal state  
(60 to 90 g/m2))  
26 1/2" x 52 1/4" (674 mm x 1,327 mm)  
When the Cassette Feeding Unit-V1 (optional)  
is installed  
Output Tray Capacity  
(Letter size paper which  
has been just opened)  
Installation Space  
(W x L)  
-
Approx. 125 sheets  
(16 to 24 lb Bond (60 to 90 g/m2))*  
26 3/4" x 52 1/4" (679 mm x 1,327 mm)  
•
MF8050Cn  
26 1/2" x 48 3/8" (674 mm x 1,229 mm)  
•
•
MF8350Cdn  
Color: 21 ppm  
B/W: 21 ppm  
MF8050Cn  
Temperature: 50 to 86°F (10 to 30°C)  
Humidity: 20% to 80% RH (no condensation)  
Print Speed (Letter Direct)  
Environmental Conditions  
Color: 8 ppm  
B/W: 12 ppm  
Color Compatibility  
Gradation  
Full Color  
256 gradations  
Output Resolution  
Gradation  
600 dpi x 600 dpi  
Acceptable Documents  
Acceptable Paper Stock  
Printable Range  
"Documents Requirements" (→P.2-2)  
"Paper Requirements" (→P.2-6)  
"Printable Range" (→P.2-8)  
"Scanning Range" (→P.2-2)  
256 gradations  
Toner Cartridges  
"Replacing Toner Cartridges " (→P.8-5)  
*
The communication time is not included.  
Scanning Range  
11-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Scanner Specifications  
Telephone Specifications  
Telephone Specifications  
Scanner Specifications  
Color scanner  
External telephone/External telephone with  
built-in answering machine/Data modem  
Type  
Available Telephone  
•
•
Platen glass: 8 1/2" x 11 5/8" (216 mm x 297 mm)  
Feeder: 8 1/2" x 14" (216 mm x 356 mm)  
Maximum Scanning Size  
•
Optical resolution  
Platen glass: 600 x 600 dpi  
Feeder: 300 x 300 dpi  
Software interpolation resolution  
9600 dpi x 9600 dpi  
Cassette Feeding Unit-V1 (optional)  
(MF8350Cdn Only)  
Scanning Resolution  
•
Cassette Feeding Unit-V1 (optional)  
Scanning Speed (300 x  
600 dpi)*  
•
•
Color: 6 seconds/sheet  
Grayscale: 3 seconds/sheet  
Paper Capacity  
Available Paper  
Power Supply  
250 sheets (16 to 24 lb Bond (60 to 90 g/m2))  
"Paper Requirements" (→P.2-6)  
From main unit  
•
•
•
•
100 Base-TX  
10 Base-T  
Hi-Speed USB  
USB  
Host Interface  
Dimensions  
(W x L x H)  
17 1/8" x 17 7/8" x 4 7/8" (435 mm x 455 mm x  
124 mm)  
Operating System  
Driver  
Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7  
Weight  
Approx. 8.8 lb (4 kg)  
•
•
•
TWAIN  
WIA 1.0 (Windows XP/Vista/7)  
WIA 2.0 (Windows Vista/7)  
*
The communication time is not included.  
Fax Specifications  
Fax Specifications  
Applicable Line  
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)*1  
Communication Mode  
Data Compression Type  
Super G3  
MH, MR, MMR, JBIG  
33.6 Kbps  
Automatic Fallback  
Modem Speed  
Approx. 3 seconds per page*2  
(at 33.6 Kbps, ECM-JBIG, transmitting from the  
memory)  
Maximum approx. 512 pages*2  
(Total pages of transmission/reception)  
Transmission Speed  
Sending/Receiving Memory  
•
•
•
•
•
(Normal): 200 dpi x 100 dpi  
(Fine): 200 dpi x 200 dpi  
(Photo): 200 dpi x 200 dpi  
(Superfine): 200 dpi x 400 dpi  
(Ultrafine): 400 dpi x 400 dpi  
Fax Resolution  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
One-touch keys (19 destinations)  
Coded dialing (181 destinations)  
Group dialing (199 destinations)  
Address book dialing  
Regular dialing (with numeric keys)  
Automatic redialing  
Dialing System  
Manual redialing  
Sequential broadcast (201 destinations)  
•
•
Automatic reception  
Remote reception by telephone (Default ID:  
25)  
Receiving System  
•
•
Send Results  
Transmission management report (Auto  
output every 40 destinations)  
Receive Results  
Report Output  
•
1
*
The Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) currently supports 28.8  
Kbps modem speed or lower. However, this depends on the telephone line  
condition.  
2
*
Based on ITU-T Standard Chart No. 1, JBIG standard mode.  
11-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
I n d e x  
Display....................................................................... 1-9  
Display Messages....................................................... 9-9  
LCD (Standby Mode) ............................................... 1-9  
Document delivery tray ...................................... 1-2  
Document feeder tray ......................................... 1-2  
Document guides.................................................. 1-2  
Documents  
C
Canceling  
Copy Jobs....................................................................... 3-2  
Fax Jobs............................................................................ 6-2  
Changing the Default Values  
Copy................................................................................... 3-8  
Fax .................................................................................... 6-20  
Cleaning the Machine.......................................... 8-2  
Exterior ............................................................................. 8-2  
Feeder............................................................................... 8-4  
Fixing Unit...................................................................... 8-2  
ITB........................................................................................ 8-3  
Platen Glass.................................................................... 8-3  
Coded Dial Codes  
Clearing Jams............................................................... 9-2  
Placing.............................................................................. 2-4  
Receiving Faxes........................................................ 6-10  
Requirements............................................................... 2-2  
Scanning Range ......................................................... 2-2  
Sending Faxes.............................................................. 6-2  
Documents Requirements................................. 2-2  
Editing............................................................................... 5-6  
Storing.............................................................................. 5-6  
Coded Dialing......................................................... 5-2  
Contents of the Setting Menu ....................... 10-2  
Copying..................................................................... 3-1  
2-Sided Copying......................................................... 3-4  
Collating Copies ......................................................... 3-6  
Enlarging/Reducing Copies................................ 3-5  
Frame Erase ................................................................... 3-6  
ID Card.............................................................................. 3-7  
N on 1................................................................................ 3-5  
Copy Mode .............................................................. 1-9  
Copyright ................................................................. xiii  
E
Error Code ................................................................ 9-9  
External telephone jack ...................................... 1-3  
F
Fax Documents in the Memory  
Forwarding ................................................................. 6-14  
History............................................................................ 6-19  
Received Fax Documents.................................. 6-18  
Transmission Documents.................................. 6-17  
Fax mode.................................................................. 1-9  
Fax Settings .......................................................... 6-21  
Feeder........................................................................ 1-2  
Front cover............................................................... 1-2  
D
Date Settings........................................................ 1-12  
Density  
G
Copy................................................................................... 3-3  
Fax ....................................................................................... 6-3  
Disclaimers............................................................... xiii  
Group Dialing ......................................................... 5-2  
Editing............................................................................... 5-9  
Storing.............................................................................. 5-9  
11-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
H
O
Handling................................................................... viii  
One-Touch Keys ..................................................... 5-2  
Editing............................................................................... 5-3  
Storing.............................................................................. 5-3  
Operation Panel............................................ 1-2, 1-7  
Fax Operation Panel................................................. 1-8  
Main Operation Panel............................................. 1-7  
Output tray .............................................................. 1-2  
I
If <Incorrect size/setting> Appears ............. 9-11  
If a Power Failure Occurs.................................. 9-14  
If You Cannot Solve a Problem....................... 9-15  
Image Quality  
Copy................................................................................... 3-4  
Fax ....................................................................................... 6-3  
Installation ................................................................. vii  
Requirements................................................................... xi  
Space..................................................................................... xi  
P
Paper  
Clearing Jams............................................................... 9-2  
Loading............................................................................ 2-9  
Paper Size and Type............................................... 2-16  
Printable Range........................................................... 2-8  
Requirements............................................................... 2-6  
Paper Cassette............................................... 1-2, 1-6  
Lock release lever....................................................... 1-6  
Paper guide................................................................... 1-6  
Paper Requirements............................................. 2-6  
Platen glass.............................................................. 1-2  
Power socket........................................................... 1-3  
Power Supply............................................................ vii  
Requirements................................................................... xi  
Power switch........................................................... 1-2  
Printable Range...................................................... 2-8  
Printing a User Data List................................... 10-2  
Printing from a Computer.................................. 4-1  
L
LAN port ................................................................... 1-3  
M
Main Specifications............................................ 11-2  
Cassette Feeding Unit-V1 .................................. 11-3  
Copy specifications ............................................... 11-2  
Fax Specifications ................................................... 11-3  
Machine Specifications....................................... 11-2  
Printer Specification.............................................. 11-2  
Scanner Specifications ........................................ 11-3  
Telephone Specifications................................... 11-3  
Maintenance and Inspections .................... viii, xii  
Manual feed transport guide............................ 1-2  
Manual Sending..................................................... 6-7  
Multi-purpose Tray (Manual Feed Slot) 1-2, 1-5  
Paper guide................................................................... 1-5  
The auxiliary tray ........................................................ 1-5  
Tray extension.............................................................. 1-5  
R
Rear cover................................................................. 1-3  
Receive Mode ...................................................... 6-10  
Answer mode............................................................ 6-11  
Auto mode.................................................................. 6-10  
Changing..................................................................... 6-12  
Fax/Tel mode............................................................. 6-11  
Manual mode............................................................ 6-12  
Registering/Setting the Various Functions 10-1  
11-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
Scan Functions ....................................................... 7-1  
Scan Mode ............................................................... 1-9  
Scanning area......................................................... 1-2  
Scanning Range..................................................... 2-2  
Selecting Print Side............................................ 2-19  
Sequential Broadcast ........................................... 6-9  
Sharpness  
Copy................................................................................... 3-6  
Fax ....................................................................................... 6-3  
Sleep Timer........................................................... 1-11  
Specifying Destinations ...................................... 6-4  
T
Telephone Equipment............................................. x  
Telephone line jack............................................... 1-3  
Text Input Method ............................................. 1-10  
Time Settings....................................................... 1-12  
Toner Cartridges .................................................... 8-5  
Checking the Toner Level..................................... 8-6  
Handling.......................................................................... 8-6  
Replacing Toner Cartridges................................. 8-7  
When a Message Appears.................................... 8-7  
Toner cartridge slot .............................................. 1-4  
Toner cartridge tray.............................................. 1-4  
Trademarks .............................................................. xiii  
Transporting the Machine............................... 8-13  
Tray extension ........................................................ 1-2  
Troubleshooting .................................................... 9-1  
Clearing Jams............................................................... 9-2  
Error Code ...................................................................... 9-9  
If <Incorrect size/setting> Appears............. 9-11  
If a Power Failure Occurs.................................... 9-14  
If You Cannot Solve a Problem....................... 9-15  
U
USB memory port.................................................. 1-2  
USB port.................................................................... 1-3  
11-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CANON INC.  
30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan  
CANON MARKETING JAPAN INC.  
16-6, Konan 2-chome, Minato-ku, Tokyo 108-8011, Japan  
CANON U.S.A., INC.  
One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A.  
CANON EUROPA N.V.  
Bovenkerkerweg, 59-61, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands  
CANON CHINA CO. LTD.  
15F Jinbao Building No.89, Jinbao Street, Dongcheng District, Beijing 100005, PRC  
CANON SINGAPORE PTE LTD  
1 HarbourFront Avenue, #04-01 Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632  
CANON AUSTRALIA PTY LTD  
1 Thomas Holt Drive, North Ryde, Sydney NSW 2113, Australia  
CANON GLOBAL WORLDWIDE SITES  
http://www.canon.com/  
FT5-2612 (030)  
XXXXXXXXXX  
© CANON INC. 2010  
PRINTED IN CHINA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Beko Washer D2 8101 ES D2 8101 E User Manual
Belkin Network Router 7 22868 53439 7 User Manual
BenQ Projector MP625P User Manual
Black Box Network Hardware EncrypTight Enforcement Point ETEP User Manual
Black Box Network Hardware GSHDSL Four Wire Ethernet Network Extender Kit User Manual
Blaupunkt Car Stereo System Tokyo RDM 169 User Manual
Bosch Appliances Food Warmer Hot Plate User Manual
Bush Hog Lawn Mower RFM 60 User Guide page
Canon Camera Lens 28 300mm User Manual
Chief Manufacturing TV Mount nag1bw User Manual